200 tl online reference owner's manual...

283
2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents Owner's Identification Form Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................2 Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System. Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................49 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls. Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................109 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features. Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................163 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo. Driving ...........................................................................................................................................................175 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer. Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................193 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................229 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them. Technical Information ...............................................................................................................................253 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information. Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................265 A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us. Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................269 How to order manuals and other technical literature. Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Upload: others

Post on 15-Jul-2020

14 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i

A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................2

Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.

Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................49 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.

Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................109 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................163 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

Driving ...........................................................................................................................................................175 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.

Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................193 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer. Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................229 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.

Technical Information ...............................................................................................................................253 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................265 A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................269 How to order manuals and other technical literature.

Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

Page 2: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

This Owner’s Manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle, and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe Acura TL. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce33SEPC00.

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

Page 3: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2004 Acura TL was a wise investment. Itwill give you years of driving pleasure.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to readthis manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Acura. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Acura dealer’sstaff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Acura.Your Acura dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased toanswer any questions and concerns.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Acura, otherproperty, or the environment.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

Page 4: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

--

--

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

Page 5: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your Vehicle at a Glance

2

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY

POWER DOORLOCKS

TRUNK RELEASEBUTTON FUEL FILL DOOR

RELEASE HANDLEHOOD RELEASEHANDLE

AUDIO SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

AIRBAGSMIRRORCONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

CLOCK

(P.93)

(P.82)

(P.97)

(P.83)

(P.165) (P.166)

(P.91)(P.9, 23)

(P.103)

(P.110)

(P.117)

SHIFT LEVER(P.178, 181)

Page 6: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your Vehicle at a Glance

3

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

HORN

WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSISTSYSTEM ON/OFF SWITCH

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

SEAT HEATERS

CRUISECONTROL

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/FOG LIGHTS(P.74)

(P.75)

(P.191)

(P.91)STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT(P.78)

(P.96)

(P.142)

(P.77)

(P.76)(P.73)

MIRROR CONTROLS

Page 7: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

4

Page 8: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains how yourairbags work. And it tells you how toproperly restrain infants andchildren in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 11............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 12

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 135. Fasten and Position the

...Lap/Shoulder Seat Belts . 14....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 16

7. Maintain a Proper Sitting................................Position . 16

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 17...Additional Safety Precautions . 18

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 19

..Seat Belt System Components . 19......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 20

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 21Additional Information About Your

.....................................Airbags . 22......Airbag System Components . 22

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 23

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 25How Your Side Curtain Airbags

.........................................Work . 26..How the SRS Indicator Works . 26

How The Side Airbag Cutoff......................Indicator Works . 27

.............................Airbag Service . 28...Additional Safety Precautions . 28

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 29

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 29

All Children Should Sit in the.................................Back Seat . 30

The Passenger’s Front Airbag................Poses Serious Risks . 30

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 32

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 32

...Additional Safety Precautions . 33...........................Protecting Infants . 34

.............Protecting Small Children . 35.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 36....................Installing a Child Seat . 37

Installing a Child Seat Using.....................................LATCH . 38

Installing a Child Seat with a..................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 40

Installing a Child Seat with a......................................Tether . 41

...........Protecting Larger Children . 42...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 43

..................Using a Booster Seat . 43...Additional Safety Precautions . 45

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 46...................................Safety Labels . 47

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety 5

Page 9: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your vehicle isequipped with airbags, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear your seat belts, and wear themproperly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat. Infants and small childrenshould be restrained in a child seat.Larger children should use a boosterand a lap/shoulder belt until they

can use the belt properly without abooster (see page ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

14

43

194

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Driver and Passenger Safety6

Page 10: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones, a collapsiblesteering column, and seat belttensioners that tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.

CONTINUED

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Driver and Passenger Safety 7

(1)(4)(3)

(7)

(2)(6)

(7)(5)

(2)

(8) (10) (9)(9)

(8)(11)

(1) Safety Cage

(2) Crush Zones

(3) Seats and Seat-Backs

(4) Head Restraints

(5) Collapsible Steering Column

(6) Seat Belts

(7) Front Airbags

(8) Side Airbags

(9) Side Curtain Airbags

(10) Door Locks

(11) Seat Belt Tensioners

Page 11: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesesafety features unless you remainsitting in a proper position andalways wear your seat belts properly.In fact, some safety features cancontribute to injuries if they are notused properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument panelto remind you and your passengersto fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts have proven to be thesingle most effective safety device.

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety8

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Page 12: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

Your vehicle has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact. (See page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork.)

25

23

CONTINUED

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

What You Should Do:

Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety 9

Page 13: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright, and as far back from thesteering wheel while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. A frontpassenger should move their seat asfar back from the dashboard aspossible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injures ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even where seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Your vehicle also has side curtainairbags to help protect the heads ofthe driver, front passenger, andpassengers in the outer rear seatingpositions. (See page for moreinformation on how your side curtainairbags work.)

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force. Sowhile airbags help save lives, theycan cause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.26

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorcollisions.

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

What you should do:

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

Driver and Passenger Safety10

Page 14: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengersand teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to ride inthe front seat.

See page for important guidelineson how to properly protect infants,small children, and larger childrenwho ride in your vehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors are closedand locked.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain control of the vehicle. Haveyour front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

29

82

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Front SeatsClose and Lock the Doors 2.1.

Driver and Passenger Safety 11

Page 15: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make sure itis locked into position. See page

for how to adjust the front seats.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

88

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

Driver and Passenger Safety12

Sitting too close to an airbagcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from theairbags as possible whileallowing full control of thevehicle.

Page 16: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See page for how to adjust seat-backs.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustablerestraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. A taller personshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.

88

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

Driver and Passenger Safety 13

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

Page 17: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

89

Protecting Adults and Teens

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

Driver and Passenger Safety14

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness, and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Page 18: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

To adjust the height of a front seatbelt anchor, press and hold therelease buttons, and slide the anchorup or down as needed (it has fourpositions).

CONTINUED

Protecting Adults and Teens

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

Driver and Passenger Safety 15

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

Page 19: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your Acura dealer check thebelt as soon as possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face. Thisprovides optimal protection from thefront airbag.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

19

78

Protecting Adults and Teens

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6. 7.

Driver and Passenger Safety16

Page 20: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating airbag.

If you are pregnant, the best way toprotect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating airbag.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Advice for Pregnant Women

Driver and Passenger Safety 17

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Page 21: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your airbags inflate.

Objects on thecovers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbagor a side curtain airbag inflates, acup holder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbags inflate.

Protecting Adults and Teens

Additional Safety PrecautionsTwo people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach or place objects onthe airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Driver and Passenger Safety18

Page 22: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If you turn the ignition switch to ON(II) without fastening your belt, abeeper will sound and the indicatorwill blink. The beeper will stop aftera few seconds, but the indicator willstay on until the driver’s seat belt isfastened.If you do not fasten your seat beltbefore the beeper stops, theindicator will stop blinking butremain on. If you continue drivingwithout fastening your seat belt, theindicator will start blinking again andthe beeper will sound at regularintervals.

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

14

40

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver and Passenger Safety 19

Page 23: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle, andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions,and they should activate in anycollision severe enough to causeairbag inflation.

However, the tensioners can beactivated during a collision in whichthe airbags do not deploy. In thiscase, the airbags would not beneeded, but the additional restraintcould be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Driver and Passenger Safety20

Page 24: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Acura provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts for U.S. models. Seeyourbooklet for details.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. Any belt thatis not in good condition or notworking properly will not providegood protection and should bereplaced as soon as possible.

218

Acura Warranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Driver and Passenger Safety 21

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularly,and have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Page 25: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your Airbag System includes:

Two SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SideAirbag’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the front,center, and rear pillars. The frontand center pillars on both sides aremarked ‘‘SIDE CURTAINAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags (seepage ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andfront passenger seat belt use whenthe ignition is in the ON (II)position.

25

26

26

20

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety22

Page 26: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflatedriver’s and front passenger’s frontairbags.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver and Passenger Safety 23

Page 27: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at the samethreshold as a conventional airbag,because the occupant would needextra protection.

If the occupant’s belt , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

is latched

less severe

Driver and Passenger Safety24

Page 28: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The passenger’s side airbag has acutoff system designed to turn offthe passenger’s side airbag if a child’shead is in the airbag’s deploymentpath (see page ).

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

If a short adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the side airbagdeployment path, the system mayalso shut off the side airbag.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson, have the passenger sit upright.Once the passenger is out of thedeployment path of the side airbag,the system will turn the airbag backon, and the indicator will go out.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

27

How Your Side Airbags Work

Driver and Passenger Safety

Additional Information About Your Airbags

25

Page 29: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle. If theimpact is on the passenger’s side, thepassenger’s side curtain airbag willinflate even if there are no occupantson that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags or seat belttensioners.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), this indicator will come onbriefly then go out. This tells youthat the system is working properly.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignition toON (II).

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

Your vehicle is equipped with sidecurtain airbags. These airbags arestored in the front, center, and rearpillars on both sides. The front andrear pillars on both sides are marked‘‘SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.’’

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works

Driver and Passenger Safety26

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

Page 30: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and the seat belttensioners may not work properlywhen you need them.

This indicator alerts youthat the passenger’s side

airbag has been automatically shutoff. It does mean there is aproblem with your side airbags.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your vehicle hasan automatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

Although Acura does not encouragechildren to ride in front, this systemis designed to shut off the sideairbag if a child leans sideways andthe child’s head is in the side airbagdeployment path.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

When you turn the ignition to ON(II), the indicator should come onbriefly and go out. If it doesn’t comeon, stays on, or comes on whiledriving without a passenger in thefront seat, have the system checked.

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

Driver and Passenger Safety 27

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

Page 31: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance-free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. If afront airbag inflates, the seat belttensioners must also be replaced.Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by an Acura dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized Acura dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If water or another liquidsoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag cutoffsystem from working properly.

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during aside impact.

Airbag Service Additional Safety Precautions

Additional Information About Your Airbags

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

Do not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto liquid.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting anAcura dealer.

Driver and Passenger Safety28

Page 32: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions many adults do not knowhow to properly protect childpassengers.

If you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a child in yourvehicle, be sure to read this section.It begins with important generalguidelines, then presents specialinformation for infants, smallchildren, and larger children.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

CONTINUED

All Children Must Be Restrained

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Children General Guidelines

29

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster if necessary.

Page 33: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

(see pages ).

(see pages ).

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children age 12 and under beproperly restrained in the back seat.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, in a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt (see page for importantinformation about protecting largerchildren).

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do thisthe passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

34 35

4542

42

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster until the seat belt f its themproperly

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith passenger’s front airbag can behazardous.

Children who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.Never put a rear-facing child seat in

the front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

All Children Should Sit in theBack Seat

Small Children

Larger Children

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

Infants

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Children General Guidelines

30

Page 34: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your vehicle has warninglabels on the driver’s and frontpassenger’s visors. Please read andfollow the instructions on theselabels.

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Driver and Passenger Safety

U.S. Models Canadian Models

31

Page 35: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your vehicle has three seatingpositions in the back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry fourchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

11

14

16

43

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Driver and Passenger Safety

Protecting Children General Guidelines

32

Page 36: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap. If you are not wearing aseat belt in crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfor a child. During a crash, the beltcould press deep into the child andcause serious or fatal injuries.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt. If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors. This can prevent childrenfrom accidentally falling out.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle. Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition can accidentally set thevehicle in motion, possibly injuringthemselves or others.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use. Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside thetrunk. Teach your children not toplay in or around vehicles. Knowhow to operate the emergencytrunk opener and decide if yourchildren should be shown how touse this feature (see page ).

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren. Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the trunk, which canlead to accidental injury or death.

84

Protecting Children General Guidelines

Additional Safety Precautions

Driver and Passenger Safety 33

Page 37: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

In this vehicle, a rear-facing childseat can be placed in any seatingposition in the back seat, but not inthe front.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theseat-back in the desired position.

If the passenger’sfront airbag inflates, it can hit theback of the child seat with enoughforce to kill or seriously injure aninfant.

In either of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat in a different backseating position or get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Child Seat Placement

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat.

Driver and Passenger Safety34

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

Page 38: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

Driver and Passenger Safety 35

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

Page 39: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

When buying a child seat, you needto choose between a conventionalchild seat, or one designed for usewith the Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a car with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerrear seats.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position, or positions,where the seat will be used.

39

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

1.

2.

3.

Driver and Passenger Safety36

Page 40: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

After selecting a proper child seat,and a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid’’. Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for a rear-facing child seat.

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Secure the child in the child seat.

1.

2.

3.

Driver and Passenger Safety 37

Page 41: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) at the outerrear seats. The lower anchors arelocated between the seat-back andseat bottom, and are to be used onlywith a child seat designed for usewith LATCH.

The location of each lower anchor ismarked with a small button abovethe point.

Each button has the symbol shownabove.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat andanchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

1.

2.

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat UsingLATCH

Driver and Passenger Safety38

MARKS

Page 42: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, and attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connection asshown above.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Other LATCH-compatible seats havea flexible-type connection as shownabove.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor (see page ), thentighten the strap as instructed bythe child seat maker.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

3.

4.

5.

6.

42

Installing a Child Seat

Driver and Passenger Safety 39

Rigid type Flexible type ANCHORAGE POINT

TETHER STRAPHOOK

Page 43: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inthe back seating positions, and in thefront passenger seat, have a lockingmechanism that must be activated tosecure a child seat.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

1. 2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat

Driver and Passenger Safety

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

40

Page 44: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is firmly secured. Ifthe child seat is not secure,unlatch the belt, allow it to retractfully, then repeat these steps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable. (Tethers are required inCanada.)

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

4. 5.

Installing a Child Seat

Driver and Passenger Safety

Installing a Child Seat with aTether

41

COVER

ANCHORAGE POINT

Page 45: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

After properly securing the childseat with the lap/shoulder belt(see page ), route the tetherstrap over the top of the seat-back.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted, then tighten the strapaccording to the seat-maker’sinstructions.

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.The following pages provideguidelines to help you decide when agiven child may ride in front, andhow to properly protect the child.

After properly securing the childseat with the lap/shoulder belt(see page ), route the tetherstrap over the top of the seat-backand through the legs of the headrestraint.Lift the anchor point lid, thenattach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

4040

Installing a Child Seat, Protecting Larger Children

Using an Outer Anchorage Point Using the Center AnchoragePoint

Protecting Larger Children

Driver and Passenger Safety42

TETHER STRAPHOOK

ANCHORAGE POINT

Allowing a larger child age 12 orunder to sit in front can result ininjury or death if the passenger’sfront airbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, and have thechild sit up properly and wearthe seat belt properly.

Page 46: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit Using a Booster Seat

Driver and Passenger Safety 43

Page 47: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster meets federalsafety standards and that you followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster mustride in front, move the vehicle seatas far back as possible, and be surethe child is wearing the seat beltproperly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child’s body is inthe path of a deploying side airbag,the child could receive possiblyserious injuries.

Some states also require children touse a booster until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the state or states where youintend to drive.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

Protecting Larger Children

When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front

Driver and Passenger Safety44

Page 48: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront. There are other importantfactors you should consider.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout the ride.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see page ). If the seatbelt does not fit properly, with orwithout the child sitting on a booster,the child should not sit in the front.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

This could result inserious neck injuries during a crash.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

Devices intended to improve achild’s comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt can makethe belt less effective, and increasethe chance of serious injury in acrash.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

43

Protecting Larger Children

Maturity

Physical Size

Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Additional Safety Precautions

Comfort and Convenience Features 45

Page 49: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the trunk lid open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk lid open, open all the windows,and set the climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:

Select the Fresh Air mode.Select the mode.Set the fan speed to high.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged the under-side.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Driver and Passenger Safety46

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

Page 50: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your Acura dealerfor a replacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety Labels

Driver and Passenger Safety 47

HOOD

DASHBOARDRADIATOR CAP

Page 51: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels

Driver and Passenger Safety48

SUN VISORDOORJAMB

Page 52: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Acura. All the essential controlsare within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 50............................Instrument Panel . 51

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 52.............................................Gauges . 57

...................Temperature Gauge . 57..................................Fuel Gauge . 57

.............Multi-Information Display . 58......Controls Near Steering Wheel . 72

.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 73...........Turn Signal and Headlights . 74

........................................Fog Lights . 75........Instrument Panel Brightness . 75

..................Automatic Lighting Off . 76.................Hazard Warning Button . 76.................Rear Window Defogger . 77

..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 78..................................................Keys . 79

................................Ignition Switch . 80........................Immobilizer System . 81

......................................Door Locks . 82................................................Trunk . 83

............Emergency Trunk Opener . 84..................Childproof Door Locks . 84

.......................Remote Transmitter . 85.................................................Seats . 90

............Trunk Pass-through Cover . 90

.............................................Mirrors . 91Driving Position Memory

..........................................System . 93....................................Seat Heaters . 96

..............................Power Windows . 97.......................................Moonroof . 100

..............................................Clock . 103...............................Parking Brake . 103...............................Interior Lights . 104

.........Interior Convenience Items . 105.......................Beverage Holder . 106

.........Accessory Power Socket . 106..................................Glove Box . 107

.............Console Compartment . 107....................Front Door Pocket . 108

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 49

Page 53: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls50

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY

POWER DOOR LOCKS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

MIRRORCONTROLS

TRUNK RELEASEBUTTON

CLOCK CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

AUDIO SYSTEM

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

FUEL FILL DOORRELEASE HANDLE

(P.93)

(P.82)

(P.97)

(P.83)

(P.91)

(P.165)

(P.103)

(P.166)

(P.110)

(P.117)

Page 54: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Instruments and Controls

Instrument Panel

51

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINTSYSTEM INDICATOR

LIGHTS ONINDICATOR

CRUISE MAININDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR

VEHICLESTABILITYASSIST (VSA)SYSTEMINDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

VSA ACTIVATIONINDICATOR

FOG LIGHTINDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMPIMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.54) (P.52)

(P.53)

(P.55)

(P.54)

(P.55)

(P.54)

(P.52, 240)

(P.56) (P.52, 240) (P.56)(P.52, 243)

(P.53)

(P.59)

(P.56)

(P.52)

(P.53)(P.54)

Page 55: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

If you turn the ignition switch to ON(II) before fastening your belt, thebeeper sounds and the indicatorflashes. If you do not fasten yourseat belt before the beeper stops, theindicator stops flashing but remainson.

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Formore information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

See page .

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). It is areminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, it canindicate a problem in the brakesystem. For more information, seepage .

If you drive without releasing theparking brake, a chime will sound,and you will see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message in theMulti-Information Display.

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals, and youwill see ‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ inthe multi-information display.

1.

2.

243

244

242

242

Instrument Panel Indicators

Instruments and Controls

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Parking Brake andBrake SystemIndicator

52

CanadaU.S.

Page 56: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If this indicator comeson at any other time, there is aproblem in the ABS. If this happens,take the vehicle to your dealer tohave it checked. With the indicatoron, your vehicle still has normalbraking ability but no anti-lock. Formore information, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to ON(II). If it comes on at any other time,it indicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This light willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,automatic seat belt tensioners, orside curtain airbags. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II). Ifit comes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For more information, see page .27

26189

Instrument Panel Indicators

Instruments and Controls

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag CutoffIndicator

53

Page 57: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II), there is a problem with theVSA system. Take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked. WithoutVSA, your vehicle still has normaldriving ability, but will not have VSAtraction and stability enhancement.See page for more informationon the VSA system.

This indicator has three functions.

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the VehicleStability Assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). See page

for more information on theVSA system.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the Cruise Control Systemby pressing the Master Button (seepage ).

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

1.

2.

3.

142

142

190

190

190

Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator Cruise Main Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

Instruments and Controls54

Page 58: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicators do not blinkor blinks rapidly, it usually meansone of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page ). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignaling.

When you press the Hazard Warningbutton, both turn signals blink. Allturn signals on the outside of thevehicle should flash.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0) without turning off thelight switch, this indicator willremain on. A reminder chime willalso sound when you open the driver’sdoor.

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II)with the headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. See page

for information on the headlightcontrols.

214

74

Canadian models only

Instrument Panel Indicators

Instruments and Controls

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

Lights On Indicator

High Beam Indicator

55

Page 59: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II). It then will go offif you have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. Itcomes on as a reminder that youmust refuel soon.

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. See page

for information on fog lightoperation.

81

75

U.S. models onlyImmobilizer SystemIndicator

Low Fuel Indicator Fog Light Indicator

Instrument Panel Indicators

Instruments and Controls56

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

Page 60: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should rise toabout the middle of the gauge. Insevere driving conditions, the pointermay rise to the upper zone. If itreaches the red (Hot) mark, pullsafely to the side of the road. Turn topage for instructions andprecautions on checking the engine’scooling system.

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

240

Gauges

Instruments and Controls

Temperature Gauge

Fuel Gauge

57

FUEL GAUGE

TEMPERATURE GAUGESPEEDOMETERTACHOMETER

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

Page 61: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The multi-information display in theinstrument panel displays variousinformation and messages. Some ofthe messages help you operate yourvehicle more comfortably.Others help to keep you aware of theperiodic maintenance your vehicleneeds for continued trouble-freedriving.

Here is a list of the messages youcan see. The following pages giveyou more information on thesemessages.

Driver 1 or 2 DetectedDoor and Trunk OpenFasten Seat BeltRelease Parking BrakeCheck Fuel Cap

OdometerTrip MeterOutside TemperatureEngine Oil Life

Maintenance MessagesTrip ComputerKeyless Memory SettingsHandsFree LinkLanguage Selection (Canada only)

With the multi-information displayand the two buttons next to it, youcan also customize these vehiclecontrol settings to your liking.

Auto door lock conditionsAuto door unlock conditionsWhenever unlocking (driver’sdoor, or all doors)Keyless lock acknowledgmentconditionsSecurity relock timerHeadlight auto off timerInterior light dimming time

To customize these control settings,see page .

Low Windshield Washer FluidLevel (Canada only)

66

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls58

SELECT/RESETBUTTON

INFOBUTTON

TM

TM

Page 62: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

><

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the basic displaychanges, as shown in the illustration,each time you press the side ofthe INFO button. If you press theside of the INFO button, the displayreturns to the previous message.

On Canadian models, the language inthe multi information display can beset to English or French. To changethe language see page .71

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls 59

(CANADIAN MODELS ONLY)

Page 63: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

When you unlock and open thedriver’s door with the key, thedisplay shows ‘‘DRIVER 1DETECTED’’ or ‘‘DRIVER 2DETECTED’’, depending on whichremote transmitter was used last.(The driver’s ‘‘ID’’ is determined bythe transmitter.)

If you use the remote transmitter tounlock the driver’s door, the displayshows ‘‘DRIVER 1 DETECTED’’ or‘‘DRIVER 2 DETECTED’’ dependingon which transmitter you use, andthe driver’s seat and outside mirrorsmove to the positions stored in thattransmitter (see page ).

If the trunk or any door is not closedtightly, the display reminds you toclose the open trunk or the door(s)before you start driving.

In addition to the Seat Belt Reminderin the instrument panel, the multi-information display interrupts thecurrent display and shows ‘‘FASTENSEAT BELT’’ for about 6 seconds ifyou do not fasten your seat beltwhile driving. This message repeatsif you ignore it and do not wear yourseat belt while the vehicle is moving.

93

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls

Driver 1 or 2 Detected

Door and Trunk Open

Fasten Seat Belt

60

Page 64: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If you start driving without releasingthe parking brake, the multi-information display interrupts thecurrent display and shows‘‘RELEASE PARKING BRAKE!’’.This message continues, and achime sounds, until you release theparking brake or the vehicle speedslows down to less than 0.5 mph (0.8km/h).

If the fuel fill cap is missing or nottightened properly, you will see‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’. Make surethe fuel cap is installed and tightenedproperly to at least 3 clicks.

The CHECK FUEL CAP messageshould go off after tightening thefuel cap, turning the ignition switchoff and on, then driving over 30 mphfor at least 45 seconds. Due todifferent driving conditions, it maytake a few drive trips to make themessage go off.

If a loose or missing fuel cap was notthe cause of the CHECK FUEL CAPmessage coming on, the messagewill turn off and the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp will come on. If thishappens, have your vehicle checkedby an Acura dealer as soon aspossible.

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls

Release Parking Brake Check Fuel Cap

61

Page 65: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your vehicle has been driven.It measures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

This meter show the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it. Thereare two trip meters: Trip A and TripB. When you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), Trip A is displayed.Switch between Trip A and Trip B bypressing the Select/Reset buttonrepeatedly. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.

If the fluid level in the windshieldwasher reservoir gets low, the multi-information display shows the abovemessage.

On Canadian models

Multi-Information Display

Low Windshield Washer FluidLevel

Odometer Trip Meter

Instruments and Controls62

ODOMETER TRIP METER

Page 66: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

To reset a trip meter, display it, thenpress and hold the Select/Resetbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’.

Both trip meters will reset if thevehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

This shows the outside Fahrenheittemperature in U.S. models, andCentigrade temperature in Canadianmodels.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls

Outside Temperature

63

SELECT/RESETBUTTON

Page 67: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

This shows the remaining life of theengine oil. It shows 100% after theengine oil is replaced and the displayis reset. The engine oil life iscalculated based on engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions.

When the engine oil life reaches 15percent, the display shows‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ and thecode for the maintenance items to beperformed.

When the engine oil life reaches 5percent, the display shows‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ along withthe same maintenance items.

Have your dealer do the indicatedmaintenance as soon as you see thismessage, and have them reset thedisplay after completing the service.

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance or do not reset thedisplay, the message changes to‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ when theengine oil life becomes 0 percent.

These messages appear on the multi-information display each time youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

For details on engine oil life andmaintenance messages, refer to page

.

Also refer to page for importantmaintenance safety precautions.

195

194

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls

Engine Oil Life Maintenance Messages

64

Page 68: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

When the multi-information displayis in the trip computer mode, pressthe Select/Reset button. The displaychanges as shown above.

The messages in this displayindicate:

When the display shows the initialscreen of the trip computer, pressthe side of the INFO button todisplay ‘‘MILES TO EMPTY’’. Thisis the estimated distance you cantravel on the fuel remaining in thetank. This distance is estimated fromthe fuel economy you received overthe last several miles, so it will varywith changes in speed, traffic, etc.

AVG MPG: Average vehicle speedAVG MPH: Average fuel economyDIST: Distance traveledTIME: Time traveled

To reset the values in the tripcomputer, press Select/Reset button,and hold it for about 1 second.

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls

Trip Computer

65

Page 69: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

You can customize some of thevehicle control settings to yourpreference. Here are the settingsyou can customize:

Auto door lock conditionsAuto door unlock conditions

Security relock timer

Keyless lock acknowledgmentconditions

Headlight auto off timerInterior light dimming time

While ‘‘Keyless Memory Settings’’ isdisplayed, press the Select/Resetbutton. The display will change tothe screen shown above.

Select the menu item you want(‘‘CHG SETTINGS’’, ‘‘DEFAULTALL’’ or ‘‘EXIT’’) by moving thepointer ‘‘ ’’ with the INFO button.After selecting a menu item, enteryour selection by pressing theSelect/Reset button.

To exit this mode without changingthe current settings, select ‘‘EXIT’’and press the Select/Reset button.The display will move to the nextmode.

If you want to change the settings,select ‘‘CHG SETTINGS’’, and pressthe Select/Reset button. The displaywill change to the screen shown inthe middle column of this page.

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls

Keyless Memory Settings

66

TM

Page 70: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

< >

>>

If you want the settings as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory,select ‘‘DEFAULT ALL’’ and pressthe Select/Reset button. The displaywill change to the screen shownabove. Press the Select/Reset buttonto select ‘‘OK’’ or press the orside of the INFO button to cancel.

The first Keyless Memory Setting isAuto Door Lock conditions. Selectthe desired condition by moving thepointer with the side of the INFObutton. On the display will be nextto the current setting.

Here are the three possible settings:

OFF: The auto door lock isdeactivated all the time.

SHIFT FROM P: The doors will lockwhenever you move the shift leverout of P. (Models with automatictransmission.)

10 MPH: The doors will lock whenthe vehicle speed reaches 10 mph.

CONTINUED

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls 67

Page 71: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The next setting menu is Auto DoorUnlocking conditions.

OFF: The auto door unlock isdeactivated all the time.

SHIFT TO P: The driver’s door orall doors depending on yourselection in the next step, willunlock whenever you move theshift lever to P.

IGN OFF: The driver’s door or alldoors will unlock when you turnthe ignition switch to OFF (0).

Enter your selection by movingthe pointer with the side of theINFO button.

To designate the door(s) thatunlock under the previous step,select ‘‘DRIVER’S DOOR’’ or‘‘ALL DOORS’’ by moving thepointer with the INFO button.Then enter your selection bymoving the pointer with theside of the INFO button.

4.

1.

2.

3.

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls68

Page 72: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

>>

The next setting menu is ‘‘KEYLESSLOCK ACKNOWLEDGMENT’’.

If you do not want the beeper tosound, select ‘‘BEEP OFF’’ and enteryour selection by moving the pointerwith the side of the INFO button.

The next setting menu is‘‘SECURITY RELOCK TIMER’’.If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock andthe security system sets.

The headlights, parking lights,taillights and licence plate light turnoff after the selected time when youremove the key from the ignitionswitch and close the driver’s door.

You can change this relock timefrom 30 seconds to 60 or 90 seconds.Select the desired relock time bymoving the pointer with the sideof the INFO button.

The last two setting menus are‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER’’and ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHT DIMMINGTIME’’.Select the time (‘‘0S, 15S, 30S or 60S’’) and enter your selection bypressing the Select/Reset button.

When you push the LOCK button asecond time within 5 seconds afteryou lock the doors with the remotetransmitter, a beep will sound toverify that doors are locked and thesecurity system has set.

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls 69

Page 73: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The interior lights fade out when youclose all doors (see page ). Selecthow long it takes for the interiorlights to fade out (in seconds) from5S, 15S, or 30S, and enter yourselection by moving the pointer withthe side of the INFO button.

You can receive or make phone-callsfrom your cell phone through yourAcura’s HandsFreeLink (HFL)system without touching your cellphone.

To use the system, your cell phoneand the HFL system must be linked.Not all cell phones are compatiblewith this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to linkyour cell phone to the HFL and howto receive or make phone calls.

154

104

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls

HandsFreeLink

70

TM

Page 74: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

>On Canadian models onlyYou can switch the language of themulti-information display betweenFrench and English.

When the multi-information displayis in the ‘‘LANGUAGESELECTION’’ mode (screen shownabove), press the Select/Resetbutton. The display will change tothe selection screen.

Select the desired language, Frenchor English, by pressing the side ofthe INFO button, and enter yourselection by pressing the Select/Reset button.

Multi-Information Display

Instruments and Controls

Language Selection

71

Page 75: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

Instruments and Controls72

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

HAZARD WARNING BUTTONHEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS/FOG LIGHTS

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

SEAT HEATERS

(P.74)

(P.75)

(P.191)

(P.91)(P.78)

(P.96)

(P.142)CRUISE CONTROL

(P.76)

(P.76)(P.73)

VEHICLE STABILITYASSIST SYSTEMON/OFF SWITCH

HORN

MIRRORCONTROLS

Page 76: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

---

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO LowHI HighWindshield Washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.

Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange to low speed operationwhen the vehicle speed exceeds 12mph (20 km/h).

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull backand hold the wiper control lever.The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers runat low speed, then complete onemore sweep after you release thelever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Instruments and Controls

MIST

OFF

INT

LO

HI

Windshield Washer

73

Page 77: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

-Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever andhold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

The rotating switchon the left lever controls the lights.Turning this switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the parking lights,taillights, instrument panel lights,side-marker lights, and rear licenseplate lights. Turning the switch tothe ‘‘ ’’ position turns on theheadlights. If you leave the lights onwith the key removed from theignition switch, you will hear areminder tone when you open thedriver’s door.

To switch from lowbeams to high beams, push the leftlever forward until you hear a click.The blue high beam indicator willcome on (see page ). Pull it backto return to low beams. To flash thehigh beams, pull the lever backlightly, then release it. The highbeams will stay on as long as youhold the lever back.

With the headlight switch off, thedaytime running lights come onwhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II) and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition off, even if you set theparking brake.

Turn SignalOffParking and instrument panelHeadlights onFog lights off (U.S. models)Fog lights on (U.S. models)High beamsFlash high beams

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.

55

Turn Signal and Headlights

Instruments and Controls

Turn Signal

Headlights

High Beams

Daytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)

74

Page 78: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

-++-

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

Adjust the brightness of theinstrument panel by pressing theor side of the adjustment button.Press to increase the brightnessand to decrease it. You can adjustthe brightness with the headlightswitch on or off.

The level of brightness is shown onthe multi-information display whileyou adjust it. It goes out 5 secondsafter you finish adjusting.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to

or . Pressing the MAXbutton will bring it to the maximumlevel.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.

Fog Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness

Instruments and Controls

Fog Lights(U.S. models only)

Instrument Panel Brightness

75

MAX BUTTON

ADJUSTMENT BUTTON

Page 79: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The automatic lighting off featureturns off the headlights, all otherexterior lights, and the instrumentpanel lights within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver’s door.

You can change this 15 second timerto 0, 30, or 60 seconds (see page ).

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your vehicle is disabled.

The automatic lighting off featureactivates if you leave the headlightswitch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’position, remove the key, open, thenclose the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter 10 minutes.

69

Automatic Lighting Off, Hazard Warning Button

Instruments and Controls

Automatic Lighting Off Feature Hazard Warning Button

76

Page 80: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The rear window defogger clears fog,frost, and thin ice from the window.Push the defogger button to turn iton and off. The indicators in thebutton comes on to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignition.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the vehicle.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

Rear Window Defogger

Instruments and Controls 77

Page 81: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

16

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

To adjust the steering wheel:

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out to the desiredposition, making sure the wheelpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and the indicators.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

Instruments and Controls78

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

Page 82: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle.

The valet key works only in theignition and the driver’s door lock.You can keep the trunk pass-throughcover and the glove box locked whenyou leave your vehicle and the valetkey at a parking facility.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your key. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly an Acura-approved key blank.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Protect the key from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

Keys

Instruments and Controls 79

KEYNUMBERTAG

MASTERKEY(BLACK)

VALETKEY(GRAY)

Page 83: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, you must push thekey in slightly. If your vehicle has anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must also be in park.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the key. Firmly turn thesteering wheel to the left or right asyou turn the key.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of theindicators on the instrument panelcome on as a test when you turn theignition switch from ACCESSORY(I) to ON (II).

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, the shift lever must bein Park before you can remove thekey from the ignition switch.

Instruments and Controls

LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Ignition Switch

80

Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

Page 84: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The Immobilizer System protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Acura dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.

If you have lost your key and cannotstart the engine, contact an Acuradealer.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System

Instruments and Controls 81

Page 85: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors. Push the bottom ofthe switch to lock the doors and thetop to unlock them.

Each door has a lock tab on the top.Push the tab down to lock the doorand pull it up to unlock. When youpush down the lock tab on the driver’sdoor, all the doors lock.

All doors can be locked from theoutside by using the key in thedriver’s door. To unlock only thedriver’s door, insert the key, turn thekey, and release it. The remainingdoors unlock when you turn the keya second time within a few seconds.

With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both master doorlock switches are disabled. If you tryto lock an open driver’s door bypushing in the lock tab, the tabs onall doors pop up.

To lock any door when getting out ofthe vehicle, push the lock tab in andclose the door.

Door Locks

Instruments and Controls

Lockout Prevention

82

Page 86: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

To open the trunk, press the trunkrelease button on the left corner ofthe dashboard. To open the trunkfrom the outside, press the trunkrelease button on the remotetransmitter.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

If your vehicle’s battery goes dead oris disconnected, you can open thetrunk from the rear seat by pullingthe trunk release handle. Reach thehandle through the trunk pass-through.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging itand to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See CarbonMonoxide Hazard, page .

To protect items in the trunk, youcan disable the trunk-release buttonon the dashboard by turning off thetrunk main switch in the glove box,locking the glove box, and lockingthe trunk pass-through cover withthe master key.

If you need to give the key tosomeone else, give them the valetkey.

46

Instruments and Controls

Trunk

83

Page 87: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up and use the outside doorhandle.

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from inside.To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

Trunk, Childproof Door Locks

Instruments and Controls

Emergency Trunk Opener Childproof Door Locks

84

Page 88: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

- -

Press this button once tolock all doors. Some exterior lightswill flash. When you push LOCKtwice within 5 seconds, you will heara beep to verify that the doors arelocked and the security system hasset. You cannot lock the doors if anydoor is not fully closed or if the keyis in the ignition switch.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door or all thedoors (depending on the KeylessMemory Setting). Press it twice tounlock the other doors. Someexterior lights will flash twice eachtime you press the button.The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany doors within 30 seconds (orwhatever setting the relock timer isset to), the light fades out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

Press this button forabout 1 second to open the trunk.You cannot open the trunk with theremote transmitter if the trunk mainbutton is turned off.

Press this button forabout 2 seconds to attract attention:the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter or turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany doors within 30 seconds, thedoors automatically relock and thesecurity system sets. To change thissetting, refer to Keyless MemorySettings on page .66

Remote Transmitter

Instruments and Controls

LOCK

UNLOCK TRUNK

PANIC

85

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

UNLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

LED

Page 89: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The driving position memoryactivated (Driver 1, Driver 2) isshown on the back of eachtransmitter. Make sure you storeyour desired driving position in thememory that is activated by thetransmitter you normally carry.

You can turn off this driving positionmemory activation. Press and holdthe LOCK and UNLOCK buttons atthe same time. The LED in theremote transmitter will blink twice.Then release the buttons. Doing thisalso cancels the keyless memorysettings for that remote and restoresthe default settings.

To turn it back on, repeat thisprocedure. The LED will come onfor 1 second to indicate the featurehas been turned on.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your Acuradealer.

Each remote transmitter alsoactivates the Driving PositionMemory System and changes thekeyless memory settings related tothat remote (see page ). Whenyou open the driver’s door afterunlocking it with the remotetransmitter, you will hear a beep.The driver’s seat and outside mirrorsmove to the positions stored in thatmemory location. You will hear two

beeps when the movement iscompleted.

93

Remote Transmitter

Instruments and Controls

Recalling a Memorized DrivingPosition

Remote Transmitter Care

86

With Driver 1 With Driver 2

Page 90: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.Battery type: CR2025

To replace the battery, place a clothon the edge of the transmitter andremove the upper half by carefullyprying on the edge with a small flat-tip screwdriver. Remove the oldbattery and insert a new battery withthe side facing up. Snap the twohalves of the transmitter case backtogether.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Remote Transmitter

Instruments and Controls

Replacing the TransmitterBattery

87

BATTERY

Page 91: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

-See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

1211

The controls for the poweradjustable front seats are on theoutside edge of each seat bottom.You can adjust the seats with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Moving the long horizontal switch onthe driver’s seat adjusts the seatbottom in several directions. On thepassenger’s seat, the long horizontalswitch moves the seat only back andforth. The short vertical switchadjusts the seat back angle.

The short horizontal switch on thedriver’s seat adjusts the degree oflumbar support.

Moves the seat forwardand backward.

Moves the seat up ordown and the rear of theseat up or down.(Driver’s seat only)

Raises or lowers the seat.(Driver’s seat only)

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Increases or decreasesthe lumbar support.(Driver’s seat only)

Seats

Instruments and Controls

Front Seat Power Adjustments

88

Page 92: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

13

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries. They are mosteffective when you adjust them sothe back of the occupant’s head restsagainst the center of the restraint. Ataller person should adjust therestraint as high as possible.

All head restraints adjust for height.The tilt of the front head restrains isalso adjustable. You need both handsto adjust the restraint. Do notattempt to adjust it while driving. Toraise it, pull upward. To lower therestraint, push the release buttonsideways, and push the restraintdown. To adjust the tilt, pivot thefront head restraint to the desiredposition.

The lid of the console compartmentcan be used as an armrest by movingit forward and backward. Make surethe armrest is securely latched.

Make sure the passenger’s hands orfingers are away from the armrestbefore moving it.

Seats

Instruments and Controls

Head Restraints Armrest

89

RELEASE BUTTON

Page 93: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.

For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key. To lock the cover, insertthe key and turn it clockwise.

Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See onpage .

The trunk pass-through cover can beopened from either side; it foldsforward onto the center armrest.Open the cover by sliding the knobdownward and pushing or pulling onthe cover. To close the cover, swingit up and push firmly on the top.Make sure it latches properly.

The rear seat armrest is in thecenter of the rear seat. Pivot it downto use it.

46Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Trunk Pass-through Cover

Seats, Trunk Pass-through Cover

Instruments and Controls90

KNOB

COVER

Page 94: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this sensing.

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

1.

2.

Mirrors

Instruments and Controls

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

91

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENTSWITCH

Page 95: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

Depending on the position of theselector switch, the left or right sidemirror will pivot downward slightlywhen you shift the transmission intoreverse. In the Left position, the leftmirror pivots. In the Right position,the right mirror pivots. This givesyou a better view of that side of thevehicle while parallel parking. Themirror returns to its original positionwhen you take the transmission outof reverse. To turn this feature off,leave the switch in the centerposition.

Outside mirror positions can bestored in the driving positionmemory system (see page ).

3.

93

Instruments and Controls

Mirrors

92

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

Page 96: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your Acura has a memory featurefor the driver’s seat and outsidemirror positions.

Two seat and outside mirrorpositions, can be stored in separatememories. You select a memorizedposition by pushing the appropriatebutton or using the appropriateremote transmitter (Driver 1 orDriver 2).

Press and release the MEMObutton on the control panel. Youwill hear a beep. Immediatelypress and hold one of the memorybuttons (1 or 2) until you hear twobeeps. The indicator in thememory button will come on. Thecurrent positions of the driver’sseat and outside mirrors are nowstored.

Adjust the outside mirrors for bestvisibility (see page ).

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).You cannot add a new drivingposition in the memory unless theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. You can recall amemorized position with theignition switch in any position.

Store a driving position only whenthe vehicle is parked.

3.

1.

2.

91

88

CONTINUED

Driving Position Memory System

Instruments and Controls

Storing a Driving Position inMemory

93

MEMO BUTTON

MEMORY BUTTONS

Page 97: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Doing any of the following afterpressing the MEMO button willcancel the storing procedure.

Not pressing a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

Readjusting the seat position.

Readjusting the outside mirrorposition.

Each memory button stores only onedriving position. Storing a newposition erases the previous settingstored in that button’s memory. Ifyou want to add a new position whileretaining the current one, use theother memory button.

To select a memorized position, dothis:

Make sure the parking brake is set(M/T) or the shift lever is in Park(A/T).

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, thenrelease the button.

The system will move the seat andoutside mirrors to the memorizedpositions. The indicator in theselected memory button will flashduring movement. When theadjustments are complete, you willhear two beeps, and the indicator willremain on.

You cannot select a memorizedposition if the transmission is inReverse. Shift to another gear,then select.

If the parking brake is not set, youmust press and hold the memorybutton until the adjustment iscomplete.

1.

2.

Notes for vehicles with M/T

Driving Position Memory System

Instruments and Controls

Selecting a Memorized Position

94

MEMORY BUTTONS

Page 98: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

To stop the system’s automaticadjustment, do any of these actions:

Press any button on the controlpanel: MEMO, 1, or 2.

If desired, you can use theadjustment switches to change thepositions of the seat or outsidemirrors after they are in theirmemorized position. If you changethe memorized position, theindicator in the memory button willgo out. To keep this driving positionfor later use, you must store it in thedriving position memory.

Adjust the outside mirrors.

Shift out of Park.

Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat.

Driving Position Memory System

Instruments and Controls 95

Page 99: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition switchmust be in the ON (II) position touse them. Push the HI side of theswitch to rapidly heat up the seat.After the seat reaches a comfortabletemperature, push the LO side of theswitch. This will keep the seat warm.

The HI or LO indicator stays on untilyou turn it off by pushing theopposite side of the switch lightly.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops. Itcontinues to cycle as long as youleave it set on HI. The HI indicatorstays on as a reminder that you havethe heater on.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly. Select the LOsetting when the seats feel warm.The HI setting draws largeamounts of current from thebattery.

Do not use the seat heaters, evenon the LO setting, if the engine isleft idling for an extended period.This can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Because of the sensors for the sideairbag system, there is no heater inthe passenger’s seat-back.

Seat Heaters

Instruments and Controls96

SEAT HEATERS

Page 100: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your vehicle’s windows are electri-cally-powered. Turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II) to raise or lowerany window.

Each door has a switch that controlsits window. To open the window,push the switch down and hold it.Release the switch when you wantthe window to stop. Close thewindow by pulling back on theswitch and holding it.

The driver’s door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open any window, push down onthe appropriate switch and hold ituntil the window reaches the desiredposition. To close the window, pullback on the window switch. Releasethe switch when the window gets tothe position you want.

Power Windows

Instruments and Controls 97

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAINSWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

Page 101: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The master control panel also hasthese features:

To open either frontwindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down to the seconddetent, then release it. The windowautomatically goes down all the way.To stop the window from going allthe way down, pull back on thewindow switch briefly.

To close either front window fully,pull back the window switch firmlyto the second detent, then release it.The window automatically goes allthe way up. To stop the window fromgoing all the way up, push down onthe window switch briefly.

To open or close either front windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly to the firstdetent and hold it. The window willstop when you release the switch.

The front passenger’s window switchalso has the AUTO feature.

If either front window runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

The MAIN switch controls power tothe passenger’s windows. With thisswitch off, the passenger’s windowscannot be raised or lowered. TheMAIN switch does not affect thedriver’s window. To cancel thisfeature, push on the switch again toget it to pop up. Keep the MAINswitch off when you have children inthe vehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

The indicators inside the switchescome on when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

Power Windows

Instruments and Controls

AUTO

Auto Reverse

98

Page 102: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or a frontwindow fuse is removed, the AUTOfunction could be disabled. If theAUTO function is disabled, do thefollowing:

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to 10 minutesafter you turn off the ignition.Opening either front door cancelsthe delay function. You must turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) againbefore you can operate the windows.Start the engine. Push down on

the front window switch until thewindow is fully open.

Pull back on the front windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by an Acura dealer.

1.

2.

Power Windows

Instruments and Controls 99

Page 103: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

You can open all of the windows andthe moonroof from outside with theremote transmitter.

You can open and close the windowsand moonroof with the key in thedriver’s door lock.

Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows andmoonroof start to open. To stopthe windows and the moonroof,release the key.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

To open:

To open the windows andmoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 15 seconds).

NOTE: If the windows and moonroofstop before the desired position,repeat steps 2 and 3.

To close the windows andmoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 15 seconds).

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows and moonroof start toclose. To stop the windows andmoonroof, release the key.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

To close:

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s doors unlock, and allfour windows and moonroof startto open. To stop the windows andmoonroof, release the button.

To open the windows andmoonroof further, press thebutton again and hold it. If thewindows and the moonroof stopbefore the desired position, repeatsteps 1 and 2.

You cannot close the windows or themoonroof with the remotetransmitter.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.1.

2.

3.

4.

Power Windows, Moonroof

Instruments and Controls

Opening the Windows andMoonroof with the RemoteTransmitter

Opening/Closing the Windowsand Moonroof with the Key

100

UNLOCK BUTTON

Close

Open

Page 104: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If the moonroof runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close themoonroof, remove the obstacle, thenuse the moonroof switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.

To close the moonroof fully, pushthe switch firmly forward. Themoonroof automatically close all theway. To stop the moonroof fromclosing fully, pull back the switchbriefly.

Make sure everyone’s hands areaway from the moonroof beforeopening or closing it.

To open or close the moonroofpartially, pull back or push forwardthe moonroof switch lightly and holdit. The moonroof will stop when yourelease the switch.

To tilt the moonroof, press straightup on the center of the switch. Tostop the moonroof from tilting fullyopen, press the switch a second time.

To slide the moonroof open, pullback the moonroof switch firmly.The moonroof automatically opensall the way. To stop the moonrooffrom opening fully, push the switchforward briefly.

Moonroof

Instruments and Controls

Auto Reverse

101

MOONROOF SWITCH

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

Page 105: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

You can use the remote transmitteror the key to operate the moonrooffrom the outside. Refer to page

for details.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition. The key-offdelay cancels as soon as you openeither front door. You must thenturn the ignition to ON (II) for themoonroof to operate.

100

Moonroof

Instruments and Controls

Operating the Moonroof with theRemote Transmitter or the Key

102

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.

Page 106: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brakeindicator on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released (see page ).

The clock displays the time with theignition switch in the ON (II)position. If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to reset the clock.

For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:001:52 will reset to 2:00

The clock is set automatically.

Change the hour by pressing andholding the H button until thenumbers advance to the desired time.Change the minutes by pressing andholding the M button until thenumbers advance to the desired time.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. If the displayed time isbefore the half hour, press the Rbutton to set the clock back to theprevious hour. If the displayed timeis after the half hour, the clock setsforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

52

On models without Navigation System

On models with Navigation System

Clock, Parking Brake

Instruments and Controls

Clock Parking Brake

103

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles.

Page 107: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The front ceiling light has a three-position switch; ON, Door Activated,and OFF.When the ‘‘ ’’ side of the switchis pushed in, both front and rearceiling lights are ON all the time.

When the ‘‘ ’’ side is pushed in,the lights are off all the time.

When neither side is pushed in(Door Activated), the lights come onwhen you:

Open any door.Unlock the doors with the key orremote transmitter.

After all doors are closed tightly,both front and rear ceiling lightsfade out in 5, 15, or 30 secondsdepending on your custom setting(see page ).

Both front and rear ceiling lightswork as individual map lights. Toturn a map light on or off, press itslens. You can use the front maplights regardless of the position ofthe front ceiling light switch.

With the front ceiling light switch inthe OFF position, the rear map lightsdo not work, and the interior lightsdo not come on when you open adoor.

70

Interior Lights

Instruments and Controls

Ceiling Light

104

Page 108: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Interior Convenience Item

Instruments and Controls 105

GLOVE BOX

CONSOLE COMPARTMENTFRONT DOOR POCKET

BEVERAGEHOLDERS

SEAT-BACK POCKETSACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

Page 109: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

Open the front beverage holder bysliding its cover backward.

The rear beverage holder is in therear seat armrest. Open thebeverage holder by pushing the frontof it, and pulling the holder all theway out.

There are two accessory powersockets. One is in the front of thecenter console under the utilitypocket lid. The other is under thearmrest in the console compartmentstorage area.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

Instruments and Controls

Accessory Power SocketsBeverage Holders

Interior Convenience Items

106

Page 110: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Open the glove box by squeezing thehandle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe master key.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theleft lever and lift up the armrest.

The coin holder inside the consolecompartment is removable. Toremove it, pull it up. The coin holdercan also be stored in either frontdoor pocket.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the right lever, and lift thearmrest. To open the consolecompartment storage area, pull upon the left lever, and lift the armrest.To close, lower the armrest, andpush it down until it latches.

Instruments and Controls

Glove Box Console Compartment

Interior Convenience Items

107

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Page 111: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The interior of each front door hasan extendable pocket for maps andother small, light weight items. Eachpocket also has a sunglass holder.You can remove the sunglass holderto make more room in the pocket.

Interior Convenience Item

Instruments and Controls

Front Door Pocket

108

Page 112: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The climate control systems in yourAcura provide a comfortable drivingenvironment in all weatherconditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 110...........................Air Flow Buttons . 112

.............................Climate Control . 115..........................Playing the Radio . 117

............................Radio Reception . 122Playing the XM Satellite Radio

............................(U.S. models) . 124.................................Playing Discs . 129

..................Protecting Your Discs . 134.....Disc Change Error Messages . 135

...............................Playing a Tape . 136................................Audio System . 139

.................Radio Theft Protection . 140............................Security System . 141

...............................Cruise Control . 142HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 145.............................HandsFreeLink . 149

Comfort and Convenience Features

Comfort and Convenience Features 109

Page 113: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Comfort and Convenience Features110

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

DRIVER’S SIDE MODECONTROL BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

Vehicles without Navigation System

DUAL BUTTON

DRIVER’S AUTO BUTTON PASSENGER’S AUTO BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTBUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDE MODECONTROL BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

Page 114: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Comfort and Convenience Features 111

OFF BUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROST BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

Vehicles with Navigation System

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

DUAL BUTTON RECIRCULATION BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

PASSENGER’S SIDEMODE CONTROL BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDE MODECONTROL BUTTON

PASSENGER’S AUTO BUTTONDRIVER’S AUTO BUTTON TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

Page 115: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Press the button to increasethe fan speed and air flow. Press the

button to decrease them.

The driver’s side temperature andpassenger’s side temperature can beset separately. Press either side’sbutton to increase the temperatureof air flow. Press either side’sbutton to decrease it. When you setthe temperature to its lower limit orits upper limit, it will be displayed as‘‘Lo’’ or ‘‘Hi’’.

This button turns the airconditioning on and off. The A/CON indicator comes on in the displaywhen the A/C is on.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior isrecirculated throughout the system.

When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (Fresh Air mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in FreshAir mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in Recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to Recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to Fresh Airmode.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).

Air flows from the floorvents. When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Use the mode control button to

select the vents the air flows from.Some air will flow from thedashboard vents in all modes.

Airflow is drivided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

77

Comfort and Convenience Features

Fan Control Buttons

Temperature Control Buttons

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Mode Control Button

Airflow Buttons

112

Page 116: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to Fresh Airmode and turns on the A/C.The driver’s side mode andpassenger’s side mode can beselected separately when the dualbutton is pressed. However, when

is selected on the driver’sside, mode selection on thepassenger’s side is not possible.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

Set the temperature to maximum.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control buttons.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereads normally.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The indicator in the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum heat.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in Fresh Air mode.

When is selected, thepassenger’s temperature cannot beset separately from the driver’s.

You can set the temperatures andmodes for the driver’s side and thepassenger’s side separately whenthis button is pressed (indicator on).When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, you can adjust bothsides to the same temperature andmode with the driver’s sidetemperature control buttons andmode control button.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.3.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

57

If the interior is very warm,

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Comfort and Convenience Features

Ventilation

Using the Heater

Using the A/C

Dual Button

113

Page 117: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Switch the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and Fresh Air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

To clear the windshield faster, youcan close the dashboard corner ventsby rotating the wheel below eachvent. This sends more warm air tothe windshield defroster vents. Oncethe windshield is clear, select FreshAir mode to avoid fogging thewindows.

Select . When you select, the system automatically

switches to Fresh Air mode andturns on the A/C. (The A/C ONindicator will not come on in U.S.vehicles.)Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

To remove fog from inside thewindows:

Select . The systemautomatically switches to FreshAir mode and turns on the A/C.(The A/C indicator will not comeon in U.S. vehicles.)Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

1.2.3.4.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.

3.

Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows

Comfort and Convenience Features

Vents, Heating, and A/C

114

Page 118: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

When you press a fan control button,the fan is taken out of AUTO modeand starts to run at its lowest speed.Press the button to makethe fan run faster.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other feature remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

Press the OFF button. However, alack of air flow can cause thewindows to fog up. It isrecommended that you keep the fanon at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.

When the AUTO button on thedriver’s side is pressed, thetemperature control buttons on thepassenger’s side are disabled, andthe interior temperature is regulatedto the temperature set on the driver’sside. When the AUTO button on thepassenger’s side is pressed,temperature can be set on the driver’sside and passenger’s side separately.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to itslower or its upper limit, the systemruns at full cooling or heating only. Itdoes not regulate the interiortemperature.

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’sinterior temperature isindependently regulated for thedriver and passenger. If the driver’sside of the vehicle is getting toomuch sun, the system will adjust to alower temperature.

Press the AUTO button.Set the desired temperature withthe temperature control buttons.You will see AUTO in the system’sdisplay.

1.2.

On models with Navigation System

Comfort and Convenience Features

Climate Control

To Cool or Heat Automatically

Semi-automatic Operation

To Turn Everything OffUsing Automatic Climate Control

115

Page 119: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Climate Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors

116

SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Page 120: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Playing the Radio

Comfort and Convenience Features 117

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

Canadian Models (Without navigation system)U.S. Models (With navigation system)

AM/FMBUTTON

SAT RADIOBUTTON

SEEKBUTTONS

VOL/PWR KNOB

SCANBUTTON

TUNE/SOUNDKNOBPRESET BUTTONS

VOL/PWR KNOB

SCANBUTTON

FMBUTTON

SEEKBUTTONS

AM BUTTON

AUTOSELECTBUTTON

AUTOSELECTBUTTON

Page 121: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

+ -

-The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing theVOL/PWR knob or the AM/FMbutton (AM or FM button onCanadian model). Adjust the volumeby turning the same knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton (AM or FM button onCanadian model). On the FM band,ST will be displayed if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: thepreset buttons, and .

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the knob right to tune to ahigher frequency, or left to tune to alower frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or SEEK button, thenrelease it.

If you do nothing, the system willscan for the next strong station andplay it for 5 seconds. When it plays astation you want to listen to, pressthe SCAN button again.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button, ortouch the SCAN icon (models withnavigation system), then release it.You will see SCAN in the display.The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 5 seconds.

To Play the Radio To Select a Station

TUNE, SEEK, SCAN,AUTO SELECT

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN

Playing the Radio

Comfort and Convenience Features118

Page 122: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

- -Each preset button orpreset icon (models with navigationsystem) can store one frequency onAM and two frequencies on FM.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelvestations on FM.

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the Auto Select featureto find stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button or theAUTO SELECT icon (models withnavigation system). ‘‘A.SEL’’ (AUTOSEL) flashes in the display, and thesystem goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. It stores thefrequencies of six AM, and twelveFM stations in the preset buttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed or see nostation number on the preset iconsafter pressing a preset button (icon)if Auto Select cannot find a strongstation for every preset button.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons (icons). Use the TUNE,SEEK, or SCAN functions to findstations, then store them in thepreset buttons (icons) as previouslydescribed.

press theA.SEL button (AUTO SELECT icon).This restores the presets youoriginally set.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton (icon).

Pick a preset button (icon), andhold it until you hear a beep.

1.

2.

3.

4.

To turn off Auto Select,

CONTINUED

Playing the Radio

Comfort and Convenience Features

Preset AUTO SELECT

119

Page 123: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

-On models without Navigation SystemBass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. In addition, you canadjust the strength of the soundcoming from the center and thesubwoofer speakers.

Press the TUNE/SOUND knobrepeatedly to display the Bass(BASS), Treble (TREB), Balance(BAL), Fader (FADE), Center(CNTR) and Subwoofer (SUBW)setting.

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the TUNE/SOUNDknob to adjust the setting to yourliking. When the level reaches thecenter, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about 5 seconds after you stopadjusting a mode.

Use the TREB/BASS modes to adjust the tone toyour liking.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjust the side-to-side strength,and FADE adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from the centerspeaker and the subwoofer speaker.

If you turn the TUNE/SOUND knoball the way to the left, you will see‘‘OFF’’ in the display, and the centerspeaker and/or subwoofer speakerwill be off.

Playing the Radio

Comfort and Convenience Features

Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

Center/Subwoofer

120

ADJUSTMENT LEVEL

Page 124: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

On models with Navigation SystemBass, Treble, Left/Right Balance,and Front/Rear Fader are eachadjustable. In addition, you canadjust the strength of the soundcoming from the center and thesubwoofer speakers.To adjust them, enter the sound gridby touching the SOUND icon on thedisplay or pressing the TUNE/SOUND knob.

To adjust thesound from the subwoofer or centerspeaker, touch or icon oneach side of the Subwoofer orCenter adjustment bar. Thencontinue pressing or , or

turn the TUNE/SOUND knob. Theadjustment bar shows you thecurrent setting.

To adjust the trebleand bass, touch or on eachside of the Treble or Bassadjustment bar. Then continuepressing or , or turn theTUNE/SOUND knob. Theadjustment bar shows you thecurrent setting.

These modes adjustthe strength of the sound comingfrom each speaker. Left/Rightbalance adjust the side-to-sidestrength, while Front/Rear faderadjust the front-to-back strength. Toadjust the left/right balance, touchthe left or right icon on the sound

grid. When you touch an icon, theyellow bars on the grid turn orangeand move toward the icon, changingthe balance left or right. At this point,you can also use the TUNE/SOUNDknob to adjust the balance. Toequalize the balance, touch the leftor right icon until each side has anorange bar at the center of the soundgrid.To adjust the Front/Rear fader,touch the front or rear icon on thesound grid. When you touch an icon,the yellow bars on the grid turnorange and move toward the icon,changing the fader to the front orrear. At this point, you can also usethe TUNE/SOUND knob to adjustthe balance. To equalize the fader,touch the front or rear icon untileach side has an orange bar at thecenter of the sound grid.To see the audio screen when youare finished adjusting the sound,touch the RETURN icon, or wait 5seconds.

Playing the Radio

Comfort and Convenience Features

Subwoofer/Center

Treble/Bass

Left/Right Balance, and Front/Rear Fader

121

FADER ADJUST ICON

CENTER ADJUST ICON

SUBWOOFERADJUST ICON

BALANCEADJUSTICON

TREBLEADJUSTICON

BASS ADJUSTICON

Page 125: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Your Acura’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

How well your Acura’s radio receivesstations is dependent on manyfactors, such as the distance fromthe station’s transmitter, nearbylarge objects, and atmosphericconditions.

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Radio Reception

Comfort and Convenience Features122

Page 126: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Radio Reception

Comfort and Convenience Features 123

Page 127: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Comfort and Convenience Features

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

124

TUNE KNOB

Without navigation system With navigation system

SATELLITERADIOBUTTON

AUDIOBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB PRESET BUTTONS

SCANICON

MODEICON

DISPLAY/MODEBUTTON

CATEGORYBUTTONS

PRESET BUTTONS

TUNE KNOB

SCANBUTTON

SATELLITERADIOBUTTON

DISPLAY/MODEBUTTON

CATEGORYBUTTONS

PWR/VOL KNOB

Page 128: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

○ ○ -- +

Your Acura is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States, except Hawaii andAlaska.XM is registered trade mark of XMSatellite Radio Inc.

Satellite radio receives signals fromtwo satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, satelliteradio also allows you to view channeland category selections in the audiodisplay.

To listen to satellite radio, turn theignition switch to ACCESSORY(I) orON (II). Push the PWR/VOL knobto turn on the audio system, andpress the button. Adjust thevolume by turning the PWR/VOLknob. The last channel you listenedto will show in the display.

To switch between thechannel mode and the categorymode, press and hold the DISP/MODE button until the modechanges. On models with navigationsystem, touch the MODE icon on theaudio display.

In the channel mode, you can selectall of the available channels. In thecategory mode, such as Jazz, Rock,Classical, etc., you can select all ofthe channels within that category.

Each time you press and release theDISP/MODE button, the displaychanges in the following sequence:channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.

You may experience periods whenXM Radio does not transmit theartist’s name and the song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

On models with navigation system,push the AUDIO button to displayXM information on the screen.

Turn the TUNE knob leftor right to select channels. In thecategory mode, you can only selectchannels within that category.

In thecategory mode, press either buttonto select another category.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

Comfort and Convenience Features

Operating Satellite Radio

MODE

TUNE

CATEGORY ( or )

125

Page 129: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

--

The SCAN function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the stations within thatcategory are scanned. To activateSCAN, press the SCAN button ortouch the SCAN icon on the audiodisplay (models with navigationsystem). The system plays eachchannel in numerical order for a fewseconds, then selects the nextchannel. When you hear a channelyou want to continue listening to,press the button or touch the iconagain.

To store a channel:You can store up to 12

preset channel using the six presetbuttons or preset icons (models withnavigation system). Each buttonstores one channel from the XM1band and one channel from the XM2band.

To store a channel:Press the button. EitherXM1 or XM2 will show in thedisplay.

Use the TUNE knob, or theCATEGORY or SCAN buttons totune to a desired channel.

In the category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In the channel mode, all channelscan be selected.

Pick the preset button (icon) youwant for that channel. Press andhold the button (icon) until youhear a beep.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

Press the button again.The other XM band will show.Store the next six channels usingsteps 2 and 3.

Once a channel is stored, simplypress and release the proper presetbutton (icon) to tune to it.

The presets will be lost if yourvehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

Comfort and Convenience Features

SCANPreset

126

Page 130: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator.

CONTINUED

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

Comfort and Convenience Features 127

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

Page 131: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the south side of aneast/west mountain roadDriving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west roadDriving in the tunnelsDriving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff or hill to the southof youDriving on the lower level of amulti-tiered roadDriving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect satelliteradio reception.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem and press the button.A variety of music types and styleswill play.

If you decide to purchase XMSatellite Radio service, contact XMRadio at www.xmradio.com, or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get yourradio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

While awaiting activation, make sureyour vehicle remains in an open areawith good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, ‘‘category’’or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the displayand you’ll be able to listen to XMRadio broadcasts. XM Radio willcontinue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hoursfrom activation request. If theservice has not been activated after36 hours, contact XM Radio.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSatellite Radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

Comfort and Convenience Features

Receiving Satellite Radio Service

128

Page 132: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

++

--

Comfort and Convenience Features

Playing Discs

129

LOADBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

DISCBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

EJECTBUTTON LOAD

BUTTONSEEKBUTTONS

EJECTBUTTON

FMBUTTON

AMBUTTON

SEEKBUTTONS

DISCSLOT

DISC/TAPEBUTTON

DISC BUTTON

DISC BUTTON

RANDOM BUTTONDISC BUTTONRANDOM BUTTON

REPEAT BUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

DISCSLOT

CD/DVD BUTTON

U.S. Models (with Navigation system) Canadian Models (without Navigation system)

Page 133: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your Acura’s audio system has an in-dash disc changer that holds up tosix discs. You operate this discchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. To operate the discchanger, the ignition switch must bein the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)position.

With the ignition in ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II), press and hold theLOAD button until you hear abeep and see ‘‘LOAD’’ in thedisplay, then release the button.

Insert the disc into the slot. Insertit only about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way.

When the ‘‘DISC LOAD’’ appearsin the display, insert the next discinto the slot.

Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last disc loaded.

The disc changer can play these discformats:

To load multiple discs in oneoperation:

If you stop loading discs before allsix positions are filled, the systemwill wait for 15 seconds, stop the loadoperation, and begin playing the lastdisc loaded.

To load a single disc:

Press and release the LOADbutton.

The disc number for an emptyposition is highlighted and thegreen load indicator comes on.When you see ‘‘LOAD’’ in thedisplay, insert the disc into the slot.Insert it only about halfway; thedrive will pull it in the rest of theway.

If you press the LOAD button whilea disc is playing, the system will stopplaying that disc and start theloading sequence. It will then playthe disc just loaded.

CDCD-RDVD-ADTS

DVD-A discs not meeting DVDverification standards may not beplayable.The changer cannot play DVD-V,DVD-R/RW, MP3, or WMA formats.Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixeddiscs are not playable.DTS is registered trademark ofDigital Theater System, Inc.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Playing Discs

Loading Discs in the Changer

Comfort and Convenience Features130

TM

TM

Page 134: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

- +

Select the disc changer by pressingthe DISC/TAPE button (U.S.models) or CD/DVD button(Canadian models). The system willbegin playing the last selected disc inthe disc changer. You will see thedisc and track numbers displayed.

To select a different disc when all sixpositions are loaded, use the preset 5(DISC ) or preset 6 (DISC )button. Otherwise, press thecorresponding number on the presetbuttons or icons. On models withnavigation system, you can alsotouch the appropriate disc icon (16) to select a different disc.

Each time you press and release theSEEK button, the player skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release the SEEKbutton to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track.

When you press the SCAN button ortouch the TRACK SCAN icon on theaudio display (models withnavigation system), the first track ofthe current disc plays for about 10seconds. You will see SCAN(TRACK SCAN) highlighted in thedisplay. To hear the rest of the track,press the SCAN button or touchTRACK SCAN again within 10seconds. If you don’t, the systemadvances to the next track, playsabout 10 seconds of it, and continuesthrough the rest of the tracks thesame way.

When you press and hold the SCANbutton until you see D-Scan in thedisplay, or when you touch the DISCSCAN icon on the audio display(models with navigation system), thefirst track of the current disc playsfor about 10 seconds. You will see D-Scan (DISC SCAN) in the display. Tohear the rest of the disc, press theSCAN button or touch DISC SCANagain, within 10 seconds. If you don’t,the system advances to the next disc,plays about 10 seconds of it, andcontinues throughout the rest of thediscs the same way. When thesystem reaches the last disc, DISCSCAN is cancelled, and the disc youoriginally had on plays normally.

CONTINUED

Playing Discs

Comfort and Convenience Features

To Play a Disc To Change Tracks

Track Scan

Disc Scan

131

Page 135: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

To take the system out of disc mode,press the AM/FM button (AM orFM button on Canadian models),press the button (U.S.models), or insert a tape in the tapeplayer. To return to disc mode, pressthe DISC/TAPE button (CD/DVDbutton on Canadian models).

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or the ignition switch,play will continue at the same pointwhen you turn it back on.

When you press the RPT button ortouch the TRACK RPT icon on theaudio display (models withnavigation system), the systemcontinuously replays the currenttrack. As a reminder, you will seeREPEAT (TRACK REPEAT) in thedisplay. To turn this feature off,press the RPT button, or touchTRACK REPEAT again.

When you press and hold the RPTbutton until REPEAT is in thedisplay, or when you touch the DISCRPT icon on the audio display(models with navigation system), thesystem continuously replays thecurrent disc. As a reminder, D-RPT(DISC RPT) is highlighted in thedisplay. To turn this feature off,press the RPT button or touch DISCRPT again.

When you press the RDM button ortouch the TRACK RDM icon(models with navigation system), thesystem plays the tracks of thecurrent disc in random order. Youwill see RANDOM (TRACKRANDOM) in the display. To turnthis feature off, press the RDMbutton (touch the TRACK RDMicon) again.

You can also play DVD-As in youraudio system the same way asplaying discs.

Comfort and Convenience Features

Playing Discs

Track Repeat Random Play To Stop Playing a Disc

Disc Repeat Playing a DVD

132

Page 136: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display.When you remove the disc from theslot, the system automatically beginsthe load sequence so you can loadanother disc in that position. If youdo not load another disc, within 15seconds, the system selects theprevious mode [AM, FM1, FM2,tape, or Satellite Radio (U.S.models)].

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 15 seconds and put thedisc changer in pause mode. Tobegin playing the disc, press the discbutton.

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it by pressingthe corresponding number on thepreset button (touching theappropriate disc icon on models withnavigation system). When that discbegins playing, press the eject button.

When you press the eject buttonwhile listening to the radio, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the discs from the changer.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off:To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button until the system beeps.

Playing Discs

Removing Discs from theChanger

Comfort and Convenience Features 133

Page 137: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality discs labeled for audiouse.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used by the disc changer.

Play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped discs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc changer.

General Information Protecting Discs

Comfort and Convenience Features

Protecting Your Discs

134

Page 138: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Message CauseIf you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to an Acura dealer.

Solution

FOCUS Error.

No CD in the changer.

Mechanical Error.

High temperature.

Press the disc eject button and remove thedisc(s). Check for an error indication. Insertthe disc(s) again. If the code does not disappearor the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult yourAcura dealer.Insert CD.

Press the disc eject button and remove thedisc(s). Check for an error indication. Insertthe disc(s) again. If code does not disappear orthe disc(s) cannot be remove, consult yourAcura dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Disc Changer Error Messages

Comfort and Convenience Features 135

Page 139: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Playing a Tape

Comfort and Convenience Features136

SEEKBUTTONS

DOLBYBUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

SEEKBUTTONS

DISC/TAPEBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

FMBUTTON

AMBUTTON

PLAY/PROG BUTTON

REW BUTTON FF BUTTON REW BUTTON

PLAY/PROG BUTTON

FF BUTTON

DOLBY BUTTON

REPEATBUTTON

TAPE BUTTON

CD/DVD BUTTON

U.S. Models (with Navigation system) Canadian Models (without Navigation system)

Page 140: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

▲ -

CONTINUED

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Make sure the open side of the tapeis facing right, then insert the tapemost of the way into the slot. Thesystem will pull the tape in the restof the way, and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator in thedisplay comes on to show you whichside of the tape is playing. Theindicates the side you insertedupward is now playing. If you want toplay the other side, press the PLAY/PROG (preset2) button or touch thePLAY/PROG icon on the audiodisplay (models with navigationsystem). When the player reachesthe end of the tape, it willautomatically reverse direction andplay the other side.

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator and NR icon (models

with navigation system) will come onin the display. If the tape was notrecorded in Dolby, turn it off bypressing the (preset 4) buttonor touching the NR icon on the audiodisplay. Dolby remains off until youpress the button (touch the icon)again.

To remove the tape, press theEJECT button. If you want to turnthe player off, press the VOL/PWRknob or turn off the ignition. Thetape will remain in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, thetape will begin playing where it leftoff.

To switch to the radio, Satellite

Radio (U.S. models) or disc changerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM button (AM or FM buttonon Canadian models), buttonor DISC/TAPE button (CD/DVDbutton on Canadian models). Tochange back to the tape player, pressthe DISC/TAPE button (TAPE/AUX button on Canadian models).

To rewind the tape,push the (preset 1 ) button ortouch the REW icon on the audiodisplay (models with navigationsystem). You will see REW in thedisplay (TAPE REW on models withnavigation system). To fast forwardthe tape, push the (preset 3)button or touch the FF icon. You willsee FF displayed (TAPE FF onmodels with navigation system).Press the , , or PLAY/PROG button (icon) to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

Playing a Tape

Comfort and Convenience Features

To Play a Tape

To Stop Playing a Tape

FF/REWTape Search Function

137

Page 141: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

- -

Press the SEEK buttonto find the beginning of the currentsong or passage. Press the SEEKbutton to find the beginning of thenext song or passage. When thesystem reaches the beginning of asong or passage, it begins to play it.

Press the RPT buttonor touch the RPT icon on the audiodisplay (models with navigationsystem) to continuously play a songor passage. You will see RPTdisplayed. The track will repeat untilyou press the RPT button or iconagain.

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination build up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your Acura dealer has acleaning kit available.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam the drive.

If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the tape player.

The SKIP and REPEATfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

Playing a Tape

Comfort and Convenience Features

SKIP

REPEAT

Caring for the Player and Tapes

138

NOTE:

Page 142: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

▲ ▼

+-

-Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the display.

If you are playing a tape, press thetop ( ) of the CH button to advanceto the next selection. Press thebottom ( ) to go back to theprevious selection. The systemsenses a silent period, then goesback to Play mode.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,XM Satellite Radio (U.S. models),CD (if a CD is loaded), or a tape (if atape is loaded).

Comfort and Convenience Features

Audio System

Remote Audio Controls

139

MODE BUTTON

VOL BUTTON CH BUTTON

Page 143: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code in thepreset buttons. Because there arehundreds of number combinationspossible from five digits, making thesystem work without knowing theexact code is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in thisOwner’s Manual.

If you should happen to lose the card,you must obtain the code numberfrom an Acura dealer. To do this,you will need the system’s serialnumber.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code.The code is located on the radio codecard included in your Owner’sManual kit. When it is enteredcorrectly, the radio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

If the code card is lost, an Acuradealer can access your code withyour radio’s serial number. Toaccess the serial number, turn theradio on. It must display ‘‘CODE’’,

then turn the radio off. Push thepreset 1, preset 6, and power buttonsat the same time, then quicklyrelease. The serial number willappear in two sets of four digits.

You will have to store your favoriteXM stations in the preset buttonsafter the system begins working.Your original setting were lost whenthe power was disconnected.

Radio Theft Protection

Comfort and Convenience Features

Radio Theft Protection

140

Page 144: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The security system setsautomatically 15 seconds after youlock the doors, hood, and trunk. Forthe system to activate, you must lockthe doors from the outside with thekey, lock tab, door lock switch, orremote transmitter. The securitysystem indicator next to the driver’sdoor lock starts blinking immediatelyto show you the system is settingitself.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotetransmitter without triggering thealarm. The alarm will sound if thetrunk is opened with the trunkrelease button on the driver’s door,the trunk release handle behind thetrunk pass-through cover, or theemergency trunk opener.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door and Trunk OpenMonitor on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ) to see if thedoors and trunk are fully closed.Since it is not part of the monitordisplay, manually check the hood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flash ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for 2 minutes, thenthe system resets. To reset analarming system before the 2minutes have elapsed, unlock thedriver’s door with the key or use theremote transmitter.

Once the security system is set,opening any door or the hoodwithout using the key or the remotetransmitter will cause the system toalarm. It also alarms if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

60

Security System

Comfort and Convenience Features 141

SECURITY SYSTEM LIGHT

Page 145: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Push in the Cruise Control MasterButton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE MAIN indicator on theinstrument panel will come on.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatoron the instrument panel comes onto show the system is nowactivated.

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRES/ACCEL button. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel comes on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

1.

2.

3.Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features142

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

DECEL/SETBUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

Page 146: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the DECEL/SETbutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the DECEL/SETbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator onthe instrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the DECEL/SET button.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal will cause the cruisecontrol to cancel.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the DECEL/SETbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle will slow down about1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

Changing the Set Speed

143

Page 147: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Press the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Press the Cruise Control Masterbutton on the steering wheel.

Pressing the Cruise Control Masterbutton turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem remembers the previouslyset cruising speed. To return to thatspeed, accelerate to above 25 mph(40 km/h), then press and releasethe RES/ACCEL button. TheCRUISE CONTROL indicator comeson, the vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Cruise Control

Comfort and Convenience Features

Cancelling the Cruise Control

144

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

Page 148: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.The HomeLink Transceiver storesthe code in a permanent memory.There should be no need to retrainHomeLink if your vehicle’s batterygoes dead or is disconnected.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. They do nothave the safety feature that causes

the motor to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with the HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver. If you do nothave this information, contact themanufacturer of the equipment.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to Step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red light in HomeLink.

The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remote controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red light flashes. Releasethe buttons, then proceed to Step 1.

1.

2.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Comfort and Convenience Features

General Information

Important Safety Precautions

Training HomeLinkBefore you begin

145

Page 149: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Press and hold the remote controlbutton and one of the HomeLinkbuttons at the same time.

The remote controlyou are training from may stoptransmitting after 2 seconds. This isnot long enough for HomeLink tolearn the code. Release and press thebutton on the remote control every 2seconds until HomeLink has learnedthe code.

The red light in HomeLink shouldbegin flashing. It will flash slowlyat first, then rapidly.

When the red light flashes rapidly,release both buttons. HomeLinkshould have learned the code fromthe remote control.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkTransceiver button by pushing it.

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so they send andreceive the correct codes.

If the button does not work, repeatthis procedure to train it again. If itstill does not work, you may have avariable or rolling code garagedoor opener. See if you do bypressing and holding theHomeLink transceiver button youjust trained. If the red light blinksfor 2 seconds, then stays on, youhave a rolling code garage dooropener. Go to ‘‘Training With aRolling Code System’’.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Canadian Owners:

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Comfort and Convenience Features

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem

146

Page 150: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Press the Training button on thegarage door opener unit until thelight next to the button comes on,then release it. The light may blink,or come on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 4 seconds.This should turn off the traininglight on the garage door openerunit. (Some systems may requireyou to press the button up to threetimes.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Comfort and Convenience Features 147

TRAINING BUTTON

Page 151: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

To train an already programmedtransceiver button with a new device,you do not have to erase all thememory. Train the selected buttonover the existing memory codefollowing the steps under

.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated by thetransmitter, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go to www.homelink.com.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Comfort and Convenience Features

Erasing Codes

Retraining a Button

TrainingHomeLink

Customer Assistance

148

Page 152: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

CONTINUED

Your vehicle is equipped with theHandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL usesBluetooth technology as a wirelesslink between it and your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone. When you arein your vehicle and your phone islinked to the HFL, you’ll enjoy safe,hands-free phone use. The HFL isavailable only in English.

When the HFL is in use, the soundcomes through the vehicle’s frontaudio system speakers. If the audiosystem is in use while making a call,the HFL over-rides the audio system.To change the volume level, use theaudio system volume knob.

The HFL microphone is on theceiling, between the front seatspotlights. On models withnavigation system, the microphone isshared with the navigation system.

Here are the main components ofthe HFL system:

The HFL can store up to 50 namesand phone numbers in its phonebook.With a linked phone, you can thenautomatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.

Here are the main features of theHFL. Instructions for using the HFLbegin on page .

HFL recognizes simple voicecommands, such as phone numbersand names. It uses these commandsto automatically dial, receive, andstore numbers. For moreinformation on voice control, seeUsing Voice Control on page .

Bluetooth is a registered trademarkof Bluetooh SIG, Inc.Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to the HFL.The HFL uses a Class 3 Bluetooth,which means the maximum rangebetween your phone and vehicle is30 feet (10 meters) or less.

To use the HFL, your phone musthave Bluetooth capability along withthe Hands Free Profile. This type ofphone is available through manyphone makers and cellular carriers.You can also find a phone by visiting

In Canada, visit

With a linked phone, the HFL allowsyou to send and receive calls in yourvehicle without holding the phone.

152

152

www.acura.com.www.acura.ca.

HandsFreeLink

Comfort and Convenience Features

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Audio System

Microphone

Phonebook

Voice Control

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

149

TM

Page 153: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

* -

To operate the HFL, use the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. Onnavigation-equipped vehicles, thereare two sets of buttons: one for thenavigation, climate control, and audiosystems, and the other for the HFL.

When you are operating the HFL, orwhen you manually scroll throughthe Multi-Information Display andselect HFL, you will see thisinformation on the screen:

Signal Strength Indicates thenetwork signal strength of thecurrent phone call. Five barsequals full strength.

Here is the function of each HFLbutton:

HFL Talk: This button is used beforeyou give a command, to answerincoming calls, and to confirmsystem information.

HFL Back: This button is used toend a call, go back to the previousvoice control command, and tocancel an operation.

HandsFreeLink

HFL Buttons Multi-Information Display

Comfort and Convenience Features150

NAVIGATIONSYSTEMBUTTONS

HFL TALKBUTTON

SIGNALSTLENGTH

PHONE DIALING

BATTERY LEVELSTATUS

HFLMODE

HFL BACKBUTTON

ROAM STATUSRefer to your navigation systemManual.

TM

Page 154: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

CONTINUED

This information is displayedwhether or not the phone is beingused:

ROAM Status (models withoutnavigation system) Indicatesyour phone is roaming.

Phone Indicates a phone iscurrently linked to the HFL.

Signal Strength (models withoutnavigation system) Indicatesthe network signal strength of thecurrent phone call. Five barsequals full signal strength.

ROAM Status Indicates yourphone is roaming.

Battery Level status Indicatesthe power remaining in yourphone’s current battery charge.Five bars equals full batterystrength.

HFL Mode Indicates when youare dialing and receiving calls.

Phone Dialing Indicates thenumber you entered or thenumber of the incoming call.

Some phones will not send thisinformation to the HFL.

Some phones will not send thisinformation to the HFL.

:

:

HandsFreeLink

Comfort and Convenience Features

Center Console Display

151

ROAM STATUS

PHONE

SIGNALSTLENGTH

TM

Page 155: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The HFL is operated by the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. The nextfew pages provide easy-to-useinstructions for all basic features ofthe HFL.

When you finish a commandsequence, the HFL goes back toits main menu. For example, whenyou store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ theHFL response is, ‘‘Eric has beenstored.’’ The next time you pressthe Talk button, you will be at themain menu.

To go back one step in a commandprocess, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or pressthe Back button.If nothing is said while the HFL islistening for a command, the HFLwill time out and stop its voicerecognition. The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins listening from the point atwhich it timed out.

To skip a voice prompt, press theTalk button while the HFL isspeaking. The HFL will then beginlistening for your next command.

To enter a string of numbers in aCall or Dial command, you can saythem all at once, or you canseparate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,10, and 11.

Note: All phones may not operateidentically, and some may causeinconsistent operation of the HFL.

Here are some guidelines for usingvoice control:

To enter a command, press theTalk button. Then, after the beep,say your command in a clear,natural tone.

If the HFL does not recognize acommand, its response is,

‘‘Pardon’’ . If it doesn’t recognizethe command a second time, itsresponse is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If itdoesn’t recognize the command athird time, it plays the Helpprompt.

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891’’.

To hear a list of available optionsat any time, press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Handsfree link help.’’

For best system operation, set theclimate control fan speed to low,and direct the center vents awayfrom the microphone in the ceiling.

To end a command sequence atany time, press and hold the Backbutton, or press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Cancel.’’The next time you press the Talkbutton, the HFL begins from itsmain menu.

HandsFreeLink

How to Use the HFL

Using Voice Control

Comfort and Convenience Features152

TM

Page 156: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The HFL will accept a numeric, four-digit passcode that you can use forsecurity purposes.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Set passcode.’’

With the ignition in the ON (II)position, press and release theTalk button on the steering wheel.After the beep, say ‘‘Security.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Security optionsare lock, unlock, and set passcode.’’

The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenew four-digit passcode?’’ (If youare changing the passcode, youwill first be asked for the currentpasscode.)

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitpasscode you want to use. Forexample, say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is thiscorrect?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Lock’’ or‘‘Unlock.’’ means the HFLwill prompt you for your passcodeeach time the ignition switch isturned to ON (II) and you pressthe Talk button. You will only beasked for the passcode once perignition cycle. If the HFL is locked,its response is ‘‘System is locked.Each time the vehicle is turned on,the passcode will be required touse the system.’’ If the HFL isunlocked, its response is ‘‘Thesystem is unlocked. Returning tothe main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The newpasscode has been stored.Returning to the main menu.’’

Once a passcode is set, you can lockthe HFL so it only operates after thepasscode is entered, or you canunlock it so anyone using yourvehicle can also use the HFL.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Security.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Security optionsare lock, unlock, and set passcode.’’

2.

1.

4.

5.

3.

1.

2.

To set your passcode, do this:

To lock or unlock the HFL, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Comfort and Convenience Features

Setting Your Passcode

Lock

Locking or Unlocking the HFL

153

TM

Page 157: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The voice of the HFL can be set tomale or female (U.S. models only).Also, the incoming notification canbe set to a ring tone, a prompt, or nonotification.

Your Bluetooth compatible phonewith HandsFree Profile must bepaired to the HFL before you canmake and receive hands-free call.

HFL does not allow you to pairyour phone if the vehicle ismoving.For pairing, your phone must be inits Discovery mode.Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFL.The following procedure works formost phones. If you cannot pairyour phone to the HFL with thisprocedure, refer to your phone’soperating manual, or talk to yourphone retailer.

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, theHFL response is, ‘‘Would you likea ring tone or a prompt?’’ If yousay ‘‘No’’ after the beep, the HFLreturns to its main menu. Saying‘‘No’’ will result in no ring tone orprompt playback during anincoming call. The audio systemwill still mute, and a message willbe displayed.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or‘‘Prompt.’’ If you choose ‘‘Ringtone’’ you will hear a ring tonethrough the audio speakers toannounce an incoming call. If youchoose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you will hearthis message to announce anincoming call: ‘‘You have anincoming call.’’

During the pairing process, turnoff any previously paired phonesbefore pairing a new phone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or‘‘Female,’’ depending on thesystem voice you want. The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Male (Female)prompts have been selected.Would you like an audiblenotification of an incoming call?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you likemale or female prompts?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

2.

1.

4.

5.

3.

To set up the system, do this:

Setting Up the System Pairing Your Phone

HandsFreeLink

Comfort and Convenience Features154

NOTE:

TM

Page 158: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Phone set up.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Phone set up optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The pairingprocess requires operation of yourmobile phone. For safety, onlyperform this function while thevehicle is stopped. State a four-digit code for pairing. Note thiscode. It will be requested by thephone.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitcode you want to use. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter’’. TheHFL response is ‘‘Searching for aBluetooth phone.’’

Steps 5 and 6 show acommon way to get your phone intoits Discovery mode. If these steps donot work on your phone, refer to thephone’s operating manual.

Follow the prompts on your phoneto get it into its Search mode. Thephone will search for the HFL.When it comes up, selectHandsFreeLink from the list ofoptions displayed on your phone.

When asked by the phone, enterthe four-digit code from step 3 intoyour phone. The HFL response is‘‘A new phone has been found.What would you like to name thisphone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to use. For example, say‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘Eric’s phone has beensuccessfully paired. Returning tothe main menu.’’

If you want to pair another phone,repeat steps 1 through 7.

1. 4.

5.

6.

7.

2.

3.

8.

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLink

Comfort and Convenience Features 155

NOTE:

TM

Page 159: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

To rename a paired phone do this: To delete a paired phone, do this:Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Which phonewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to rename.For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenew name for Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the new nameof the phone. For example, say‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘The name has been changed.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Which phonewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to delete. Forexample say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you liketo delete Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing todelete Eric’s phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ tocontinue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel.’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, theHFL response is ‘‘The phone hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu’’. If you say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not bedeleted.

2.

3.

4.1. 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

HandsFreeLink

Comfort and Convenience Features156

TM

Page 160: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

To list all paired phones, do this: To find out the status of the phone beingused, do this:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone, do this:Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button .After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Searchingfor the next phone.’’ The HFLthen disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone. If no other phones arefound, the first phone remainslinked.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing the nameof each paired phone. When allphones paired to the system havebeen read, the HFL response is‘‘The entire list has been read.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ Anexample of the HFL response is,‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Batterystrength is three bars. Signalstrength is five bars, and thephone is roaming. Returning to themain menu.’’

2.

1.1.

2.

1.

HandsFreeLink

Comfort and Convenience Features 157

TM

Page 161: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

You can make calls using any phonenumber, or by using a name in theHFL phonebook. You can also redialthe last number called. During a call,the HFL allows you to talk up to 30minutes after you remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial’.’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to call. For example, say‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, orcontinue to add numbers.’’

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to call. For example, say

‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

To redial the last number called bythe phone, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

1.

3.

3.

1.

2.

2.

4.

4.

To make a call using a phone number,do this:

To make a call using a name in the HFLphonebook, do this:

Making a Call

HandsFreeLink

Comfort and Convenience Features158

TM

Page 162: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If you receive a call when you are noton the phone, the HFL interrupts theaudio system (if it is on), and playsthe incoming call notification, ifactivated. To answer the call, pressthe Talk button and begin speaking.If you don’t want to answer the call,press the Back button.

The HFL allow you to send numbersor names during a call. This isusefull when you call a menu-drivenphone system. You can also programaccount numbers into the HFLphonebook for easy retrieval duringmenu-driven calls.

If your phone has Call Waiting, andyou receive a call when you are onthe phone, press the Talk button toanswer it. When you do this, theoriginal call is placed on hold. Toreturn to the original call, press theTalk button again. If you don’t wantto answer the new call, disregard it,and continue with your original call.If you want to hang up the originalcall and answer the new call, pressthe Back button.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to send. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue toadd numbers.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to send. For example, say‘‘Account number.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Would you like tosend account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

3.

To send a number during a call, do this:

To send a name during a call, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Comfort and Convenience Features

Receiving a CallSending Numbers or NamesDuring a Call

159

TM

Page 163: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

During a call, you can transfer itfrom the HFL to your phone, or fromyour phone to the HFL.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer’’.The audio switches from the HFLto the phone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’The audio switches from yourphone to the HFL.

During a call, you can mute orunmute your voice to the personyou’re talking to.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute iscancelled.’’

The HFL phonebook can store upto 50 names with their associatednumbers. These can be any typesof numbers. For example, you canstore a phone number and use it tomake a call, or you can store anaccount number and use it duringa call to a menu-driven phonesystem.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to store?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Eric’’ or sey ‘‘account number.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenumber for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is thenumber for account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the number.For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’The HFL response is ‘‘123 4567891.’’

2.

3.

1.

1.

2.

4.

2.

1.

To transfer a call from the HFL to yourphone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to theHFL, do this:

To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this:

To add a name, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Comfort and Convenience Features

Transferring a Call

Muting a Call

Setting up the Phonebook

160

TM

Page 164: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

CONTINUED

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to delete. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Do you want to delete Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘The name hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘ThePhonebook options are store, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the newnumber for Eric. For example, say‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The number hasbeen changed. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Eric (or accountnumber) has been stored.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to edit. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘What is the new number forEric?’’

2.

1.

4. 3.

4.5.

1.2.

1.

3.

5.

To list all names in the phonebook, dothis:

To delete a name, do this:

To edit the number of a name, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Comfort and Convenience Features 161

TM

Page 165: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘This processwill clear all paired phones, clearall entries in the phonebook, andclear the passcode. Is this whatyou would like to do?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing toclear all paired phones, allphonebook entries, and thepasscode. This may take up to 2minutes to complete.’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘OK.’’ to proceed, or say‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’

If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a shortperiod of time, the HFL responseis, ‘‘System has been cleared.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. Whenthe end of the list is reached, theHFL response is, ‘‘The entire listhas been read. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. When itsays the name you want to call, forexample, Eric, press the Talkbutton, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Would you liketo call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Onceconnected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob.

This operation clears the HFL ofyour passcode, your paired phones,and all names in the HFL phonebook.Clearing is recommended before yousell your vehicle.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

2.

3.

4.

1.

1.

2.

3.

2.

To call a name from the phonebook list,do this:

To clear the system, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Comfort and Convenience Features

Clearing the System

162

TM

Page 166: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Before you begin driving your Acura,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your vehicle,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 164...............................Gasoline Type . 164

.........Service Station Procedures . 165...............................Fuel Economy . 168

...Accessories and Modifications . 169.............................Carrying Cargo . 171

Before Driving

Before Driving 163

Page 167: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).Do not change the oil until themulti-information display indicatesit is needed.

You should follow these samerecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are relined.

Your Acura is designed to operate onunleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 91 or higher.Use of a lower octane gasoline cancause occasional metallic knockingnoises in the engine and will result in

decreased engine performance.

You may hear a knocking noise fromthe engine if you drive the vehicle atlow engine speed (below about 1,000rpm) in a higher gear. To stop this,raise engine speed by shifting to alower gear.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits. Inaddition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the Malfunction IndicatorLamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contact

your authorized Acura dealer forservice.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to yourQuick Start Guide.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 percent ethanolby volume and up to 15 percentMTBE by volume. Do not usegasoline containing methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

On TL with manual transmission

Break-in Period, Gasoline Type

Break-in Period

Gasoline Type

Before Driving164

Page 168: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. Consult your dealer.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least three times.If you do not properly tighten thecap, the Malfunction IndicatorLamp may come on (see page

).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the knob on the cap in thenotch on the fuel fill door.

1.

2.

3.

4.

6.

5.

243

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Fueling

165

Pull

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flamesaway.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Page 169: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Put your fingers between the frontedge of the hood and the frontgrille to locate the hood latchhandle. Push this handle up until itreleases the hood. Lift the hood.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated (see page ).

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

Lower the hood to about a foot (30cm) above the fender, then pressdown firmly with your hands. Makesure it is securely latched.

1.

2. 3.

212

Service Station Procedures

Opening the Hood To Close the Hood

Before Driving166

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

LATCH

Page 170: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourAcura.

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe off the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its tube.

4.

1.

2.

3198

204

207

Service Station Procedures

Oil Check

Adding Oil

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

Before Driving 167

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

DIPSTICK

RESERVE TANK

MIN

MAX

Page 171: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenancemessages given by the multi-information display. See

on page.

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use the cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

198

For example,

Fuel Economy

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Before Driving168

Page 172: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake it unsafe. Before you make anymodifications or add any accessories,be sure to read the followinginformation.

Your dealer has Acura accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Before installing any accessory:Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation.

Have the installer contact yourAcura dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas the SRS and the anti-lock brakesystem.

Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability (see page ).

245

170

Accessories

Before Driving

Accessories and Modifications

169

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Page 173: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Acura (aftermarket) componentscould seriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:Lowering your vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Aftermarket wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective. See the safetyprecautions on page .

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your Acura dealer.

28

Modifying Your Vehicle

Before Driving

Accessories and Modifications

170

Page 174: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxFront door and seat-back pocketsConsole compartmentTrunkRoof-rack (if installed)

In addition, the trunk pass-throughallows you to carry longer items.However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

Before Driving

Carrying Cargo

171

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET

TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKET GLOVE BOX

Page 175: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

×

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (395 kg). This figureincludes total weight of all occupants,cargo, and accessories.

To determine the correct cargo andluggage load limit:

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 850 lbs(395 kg)’’ on your vehicle’s placard(on the driver’s doorjamb).

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in the vehicle.(Five is seating capacity of yourvehicle.)

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from850 lbs (395 kg).

The resulting figure equals theavailable load capacity.

For example, if there will be four 150lbs (70 kg) occupants in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 250 lbs (115kg).4 150 lbs (70 kg) = 600 lbs (280kg)850 lbs (395 kg) 600 lbs (280 kg) =250 lbs (115 kg)

Determine the combined weightof accessories, luggage, and cargobeing loaded in the vehicle. Theweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.

1.

5.

3.

2.

4.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving172

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Page 176: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your Acuradealer for further information.

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe pedals or seat operation.

Do not put any items on top of thetrunk panel. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

The cargo net can be used to helphold down items stored in the trunk.To use the cargo net, hook it to thebuttons on the floor and sides of thetrunk. You can use the cargo net inseveral configurations by hooking itto different buttons. There is also aside net that can be used on eitherside of the trunk.When you are not using the cargonet, store it in the pocket in the sparetire tool case.

46

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Cargo Nets

173

CARGO NET

TRUNK NET HOOK

SIDE NET

Page 177: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

174

Page 178: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate the6-speed manual and the automatictransmission. It also includesimportant information on parkingyour vehicle, the braking system andthe Vehicle Stability Assist System.

........................Preparing to Drive . 176.......................Starting the Engine . 177

....6-Speed Manual Transmission . 178..............Automatic Transmission . 181

...........................................Parking . 187.............................Braking System . 188

...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 189...Vehicle Stability Assist System . 190

...........................Towing a Trailer . 192

Driving

Driving 175

Page 179: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood and trunk arefully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicator lights in theinstrument panel (see page ).

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

88

91

78

14

51

Preparing to Drive

Driving176

Page 180: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in START for more than15 seconds at a time. If the enginedoes not start right away, pausefor at least 10 seconds beforetrying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Driving

Starting the Engine

177

NOTICE: The engine is harder to startin cold weather. Also, the thinner airf ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet(2,400 meters) adds to this problem.

Page 181: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure engine speed will not gointo the tachometer’s red zone in thelower gear.

The manual transmission issynchronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift fromfifth to Reverse instead of sixth (seepage ) while the vehicle ismoving. When shifting up or down,make sure you push the clutch pedaldown all the way, shift to the nextgear, and let the pedal up gradually.When you are not shifting, do notrest your foot on the clutch pedal.This can cause your clutch to wearout faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into Reverse, or shift intoone of the forward gears for amoment. This stops the gears sothey won’t ‘‘grind.’’

180

The engine can be damaged ifyou inadvertently downshift into thewrong gear (for example, going fromthird gear at high rpms to second gearinstead of upshifting to fourth gear; therev limiter will not work in this situation).

6-speed Manual Transmission

Driving178

Note:

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

Page 182: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th5th to 6th

Normal acceleration

17 mph (27 km/h)27 mph (43 km/h)36 mph (58 km/h)41 mph (66 km/h)44 mph (71 km/h)

Driving

Engine Speed LimiterRecommended Shift Points

6-speed Manual Transmission

179

Page 183: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The 6-speed manual transmissionhas an electric lockout so you cannotaccidentally shift from Fifth toReverse instead of Sixth. If youcannot shift to Reverse when thevehicle is stopped:

With the clutch pedal pressed,move the shift lever to the first/second gear side of the Neutralgate, then shift to Reverse.

If you are still unable to shift toReverse, apply the parking brakeand turn the ignition key toACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

Press the clutch pedal, and shift toReverse.

With the clutch pedal still pressed,start the engine.

If you need to use this procedure toshift to Reverse, your vehicle may bedeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your Acuradealer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Driving

6-speed Manual Transmission

Reverse Lockout

180

Page 184: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in. The illuminated numbernext to the ‘‘L’’ indicator shows youthe gear you have selected in theSequential SportShift mode.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If itflashes while driving (in any shiftposition), it indicates a possibleproblem in the transmission. Avoidrapid acceleration and have thetransmission checked by an Acuradealer as soon as possible.

To shift from any position, pressfirmly on the brake pedal. Youcannot shift out of Park when theignition switch is in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position.

CONTINUED

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Automatic Transmission

Driving 181

Page 185: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

- -

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

Your vehicle has a reverse lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift toReverse from Neutral or any otherdriving position when the vehiclespeed exceeds 5 6 mph (8 10km/h).

If you cannot shift to Reverse whenthe vehicle is stopped, press thebrake pedal and slowly shift toNeutral, and then to Reverse.

If there is a problem in the reverselockout system, or your vehicle’s

battery is disconnected or goes dead,you cannot shift to Reverse. (Referto Shift Lock Release on page ).

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from Neutral toanother gear.

Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear for your speed and acceleration.

For faster acceleration when in D,you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down one,two or three gears, depending onyour speed.

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

Press the brakepedal to shift from Park to Reverse.To shift from Neutral to Reverse,come to a complete stop and thenshift.

185

185To shift from:

P to R

R to NN to DD to LL to DD to NN to RR to P

Do this:Press the brake pedal, thenmove the shift lever.

Move the lever.

Neutral (N)

Drive (D)

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Automatic Transmission

Driving182

Page 186: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

When you accelerate away from astop, the transmission will start infirst gear and then automaticallyupshift to second gear. You have tomanually upshift between secondand fifth gears. Make sure youupshift before the engine speedreaches the tachometer’s red zone.The transmission remains in theselected gear (5, 4, 3). There is noautomatic downshift when you pushthe accelerator pedal to the floor.

When you move theshift lever to this position, thetransmission shifts to the lowestgear that can be selected withoutexceeding the engine redline. Atnormal speeds, it selects third gear.As the vehicle slows, it selectssecond gear at about 53 mph(85 km/h), and first gear at about 28mph (45 km/h). Accelerating in firstgear, the transmission upshifts tosecond gear at about 37 mph(59 km/h). You must move the shiftlever to D for the transmission toupshift to third gear.

In Sequential SportShift mode, eachtime you push forward on the shiftlever, the transmission shifts to ahigher gear. Pull back on the lever todownshift. The number of the gearselected is displayed on theinstrument panel.

Withthe shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position, youcan select the Sequential SportShiftMode to shift gears much like amanual transmission, but without aclutch pedal.To enter the Sequential SportShiftMode, move the shift lever further tothe driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D’’,move the shift lever to the

passenger’s side.When you move the shift lever from‘‘D’’ to the Sequential SportShiftmode, the display shows the selectedgear.

CONTINUED

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Low (L)

Sequential SportShift Mode

183

Down shiftSELECTED GEAR

Page 187: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

→→

The transmission may automaticallydownshift from the higher gear tothe lower gear under theseconditions:

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing, and provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.

The transmission will also shiftautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It will downshift tofirst gear when the vehicle speed isunder 9 mph (15 km/h).

If you try to manually downshift at aspeed that would cause the engine toexceed the redline in a lower gear,the transmission will not downshift.

If the vehicle speed slows to belowthe redline of the selected lower gearposition while the indicator isflashing, the transmission willdownshift and the display will showthe selected lower gear.

The table shows the speed rangesfor upshifting and downshifting.

To shift from

4 3

5 4

To shift from

4 3

5 4To shift from

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

The gear indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to the higher gear.

Speed range

over 0 mph(0 km/h)

over 9 mph(15 km/h)

over 18 mph(29 km/h)

over 37 mph(60 km/h)

Speed range

under 18 mph(29 km/h)

under 38 mph(60 km/h)

Speed range

under 41 mph(65 km/h)

under 47 mph(75 km/h)

Driving uphill

Driving on level roads and downhill

Automatic Transmission

Driving184

Page 188: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

To shift from

3 2

4 3

5 4

When you are in SequentialSportshift mode, and the vehicle isstopped, push forward on the shiftlever to shift to second gear. You willsee ‘‘2’’ in the display. Starting out insecond gear will help to reducewheelspin in deep snow or on aslippery surface.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal does not work. This procedureis also used to release the ReverseLockout.

Set the Parking brake.

Make sure the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) position.

To release the Reverse Lockout,make sure the ignition switch is inthe ACCESSORY (I) position.

Speed range

under 63 mph(102 km/h)

under 97 mph(156 km/h)

under 149 mph(240 km/h)

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Starting in Second Gear

Engine Speed Limiter

Shift Lock Release

Driving

Automatic Transmission

185

Page 189: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a metalfingernail file to remove the cover.Carefully pry on the edge of thecover.

Push down on the key and movethe shift lever out of Park toNeutral.

To release the Reverse Lockout,move the shift lever from Neutralto Reverse, then to Park.

Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then reinstallthe cover. Make sure the notch onthe cover is on the right side.Press the brake pedal, and restartthe engine.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by an Acura dealer.

Insert a key into the Shift LockRelease slot.

3.

6.

5.

4.

Automatic Transmission

Driving186

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOTCOVER

Page 190: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If you have a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Lock the doors.

Parking Tips

Parking

Driving 187

Page 191: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,

etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

Your Acura is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectiveness.It also keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Braking System Design

Brake Wear Indicators

Braking System

Driving188

Front

Page 192: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andmay hear some noise. This is normal:it is the ABS rapidly pumping thebrakes. On dry pavement, you willneed to press on the brake pedalvery hard before the ABS activates.However, you may feel the ABSactivate immediately if you are tryingto stop on snow or ice.

If the ABS indicator comes on, theanti-lock function of the brakingsystem has shut down. The brakesstill work like a conventional system,but without anti-lock. You shouldhave the dealer inspect your vehicleas soon as possible.

it only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

You should never pump the brake pedal.ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

ABS Indicator Important Safety RemindersABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle;

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving 189

Page 193: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The Vehicle Stability Assist systemhelps to stabilize the vehicle duringcornering if the vehicle turns moreor less than desired. It also assistsyou in maintaining traction whileaccelerating on loose or slipperyroad surfaces. It does this byregulating the engine’s output, andby selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times.

If the VSA system indicator comeson while driving, pull to the side ofthe road when it is safe, and turn offthe engine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by an Acura dealer.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA Activation indicator blink.

In manual transmission models, ifthe VSA system is off and youaccelerate from a stop, the vehiclemay pull, and it may take extra effortto return the steering wheel tocenter.

VSA Activation Indicator VSA System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Driving190

Page 194: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned toON (II), there may be a problemwith the VSA system. Have an Acuradealer inspect your vehicle as soonas possible.

Without VSA, your vehicle will havenormal braking and cornering ability,but it will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

This switch is under the left vent.Press it to turn the Vehicle StabilityAssist system on and off.

When VSA is off, the VSA ActivationIndicator comes on as a reminder.Pressing the switch again turns thesystem back on.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

224

230

VSA Off Switch

VSA and Tire Sizes

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

Driving 191

VSA OFF SWITCH

Page 195: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your vehicle is not designed to tow atrailer. Attempting to do so can voidyour warranties.

Towing a Trailer

Driving192

Page 196: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance messages in the Multi-Information Display, a MaintenanceRecord, and instructions for simplemaintenance tasks you may want totake care of yourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Acura, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Acuradealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 194....................Maintenance Minder . 195....................Maintenance Record . 200

..............................Fluid Locations . 202......Engine Compartment Covers . 203

........................Adding Engine Oil . 204.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 205

..............................Engine Coolant . 207....................Windshield Washers . 208

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 209........Manual Transmission Fluid . 210

................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 211....................Power Steering Fluid . 212

....................................Hood Latch . 212.............................................Lights . 213

.......................................Seat Belts . 218.....................................Floor Mats . 218

.................................Wiper Blades . 219...............................................Tires . 220

...................Checking the Battery . 226.............................Vehicle Storage . 227

269

Maintenance

Maintenance 193

Page 197: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by anAcura technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance

Important Safety Precautions

Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

194

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations in this owner’smanual.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Page 198: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

One of the most convenient andimportant features of the Multi-Information Display on your Acura isthe Maintenance Minder.

Based on engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour Acura calculates the remainingengine oil life.

When the remaining engine oil life is15 percent, you will see the message‘‘SERVICE DUE SOON’’ along withall maintenance items that areneeded at oil change time. Refer topage for a complete list of themaintenance main items and subitems.

The system also displays the codefor other scheduled maintenanceitems needing service. The remaining engine oil life is

displayed on the Multi-InformationDisplay as a percentage when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

199

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance 195

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCESUB ITEMS

Page 199: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

< >

< >

When the remaining oil life is lessthan 5 percent, you will see themessage ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’with the same maintenance itemsyou saw when ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ was displayed. When yousee this message, have the indicatedmaintenance performed as soon aspossible.

Your Acura dealer will reset thedisplay after completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display thenext time you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your Acuradealer, reset the display as follows:

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Press the or buttonrepeatedly until the oil life isdisplayed.

Press and hold the Select/Resetbutton for 10 seconds. The Multi-Information Display will ask for aconfirmation.

If you are sure you want to resetthe display, press the Select/Reset button to select ‘‘OK’’.If you do not want to reset thedisplay, press the orbutton to select ‘‘Cancel’’.

1.

2.

3.

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance196

Page 200: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If you have the required serviceperformed but do not reset thedisplay, or reset the display withoutperforming the service, the systemwill not show the propermaintenance intervals. This can leadto serious mechanical problemsbecause you will no longer have anaccurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

If the indicated maintenance serviceis not done and the remaining engineoil life gets less than 0 percent, youwill see the message ‘‘SERVICEPAST DUE’’ on the display.Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as previously described.

Your authorized Acura dealer knowsyour vehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all receiptsas proof of completion, and have theperson who does the work fill out theMaintenance Record. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend the use of Acuraparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance 197

Page 201: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Acurarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed in accordancewith the intervals indicated by theMulti-Information Display.

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

167

167

209

211

222

213

Maintenance Minder

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

198

Page 202: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Maintenance

Maintenance Minder

199

:

Independent of the maintenance messages in the Multi-InformationDisplay, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.

If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 monthsafter the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, the first column,page .

Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.

NOTE:

1 :

198

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterRotate tiresInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentVisually inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and line (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive primarily in dusty conditions, replaceevery 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds results in higher transmission temperatures.This requires transmission fluid changes morefrequently than recommended by the MaintenanceMinder. If you regulary drive your vehicle under theseconditions, have the transmission fluid changed at60,000 miles (100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles(48,000 km).

Replace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pump

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under-20°F,29°C), replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/100,000 km(Canada)

Inspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

AB

Symbol Symbol12

3

4

5

1

Main

tenance

Min

der

Page 203: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Maintenance Record

Maintenance200

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on yourvehicle.

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Page 204: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Maintenance Record

Maintenance 201

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

A B 1 2 3 4 5

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Page 205: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Fluid Locations

Maintenance202

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINECOOLANTRESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

CLUTCH FLUID(Manual Transmissiononly)

Page 206: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The component parts in the enginecompartment are protected byseveral covers. You may need toremove the covers when youperform some simple maintenancework.

Most of the covers can be removedsimply by pulling them straight up.

To remove the left or right cowlcover, push the tabs inward and pullthe cover straight up.

To remove the front bulkhead cover,first remove the four holding clipsusing a flat-tipped screwdriver.

When reinstalling the covers, makesure the pins and tabs are in theirproper positions.

Engine Compartment Covers

Maintenance 203

FRONT BULKHEAD COVER

COWL COVERS

Page 207: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’.

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Acura toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.Unscrew and remove the engine oil

fill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment. Install the engine oilfill cap and tighten it securely. Wait afew minutes and recheck the oil level(see page ). Do not fill above theupper mark on the dipstick; youcould damage the engine.

167

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance

Recommended Engine Oil

204

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

Page 208: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Sealand it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals shown on the Multi-Information Display.

Your Acura does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the Multi-Information Display. The oil andfilter collect contaminants that candamage your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

2.

1.

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

Maintenance

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Oil and Filter

205

DRAIN BOLT WASHER

Page 209: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from your Acuradealer) is required.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

3.

7.

8.

9.

5.

6.

4.

Changing the Oil and Filter

Maintenance206

NOTICE:

OIL FILTER

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Improper disposal of engineoil can be harmf ul to the environment.If you change your own oil, pleasedispose of the used oil properly. Put itin a sealed container, and take it to arecycling center. Do not discard usedoil in a trash bin or dump it on theground.

Page 210: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Engine Coolant

Maintenance

Adding Engine Coolant

207

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 211: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill. Cleanup any spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Put the radiator cap back on andtighten it.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

If the fluid levelis low, a message will be shown onthe Multi-Information Display.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

3.

1.

2.

4.

5.

On Canadian models:

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

Maintenance

Windshield Washers

208

NOTICE:

RADIATOR CAP

Do not use engine antif reezeor a vinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

Page 212: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Within 60 to 90 seconds, removethe dipstick (yellow loop) from thetransmission, and wipe it with aclean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission securely.

Remove the dipstick, and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the filler holeto bring it to the upper mark.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality.Have the transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is shown on a maintenancemessage in the Multi-InformationDisplay.

To thoroughly flush thetransmission, the technicianshould drain and refill it withHonda ATF-Z1, then drive thevehicle for a short distance. Dothis three times. Then drain andrefill the transmission a final time.

Insert the dipstick all the way backin the transmission.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5. 6.

Automatic Transmission Fluid

Maintenance 209

UPPERMARK

LOWERMARK

DIPSTICK

Page 213: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove the checkbolt, and look for transmission fluidcoming out of the bolt hole. If a smallamount of fluid drips out of the bolthole, reinstall the check bolt.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.

If no fluid comes out, remove thefiller bolt. Slowly add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the check bolthole. Let the fluid run out until itstops, then reinstall the check boltand the filler bolt.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is shown on a maintenancemessage in the Multi-InformationDisplay.

Manual Transmission Fluid

Maintenance

Manual Transmission Fluid

210

CHECK BOLT

DRAIN BOLT

FILLER BOLT

Page 214: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly after removingthe engine compartment rear cover(see page ).

Replace it every 3 years, independentof mileage.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

A low fluid level can indicate a leakin the clutch system. Have thissystem inspected as soon as possible.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

203

Manual Transmission only

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance

Brake System Clutch System

211

MAX

MIN

MAX

MIN

Page 215: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold,and the engine compartment right-side cover is off (see page ). Thefluid should be between the UPPERLEVEL and LOWER LEVEL. If not,add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

Periodically clean the hood latchassembly with a mild cleaner, thenlubricate it with a multipurposegrease. Lubricate all the movingparts (as shown), including the pivot.If you are not sure how to do this,contact your Acura dealer.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergency

replacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

203

Power Steering Fluid, Hood Latch

Maintenance

Power Steering Fluid Hood Latch

212

NOTICE:

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

PIVOTS

LATCHASSEMBLY

Turning the steering wheel tof ull lef t or right lock and holding itthere can damage the power steeringpump.

Page 216: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

CONTINUED

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk, readjustment may be required.Adjustment should be performed byan Acura dealer or other qualifiedmechanic.

The headlight bulbs are a type ofhigh voltage discharge tube. Highvoltage can remain in the circuiteven with the light switch off and thekey removed. Because of this, youshould not attempt to examine orchange a headlight bulb yourself. If aheadlight bulb fails, take yourvehicle to a dealer to have it replaced.

Remove the left or right sideengine compartment cover fromthe side you are working on bycarefully pulling the cover out.

If you are replacing the bulb onthe driver’s side, remove the airintake cover by removing the twofastener pins and pulling the coverout. Then remove the upper partof the air intake duct by pulling itstraight up.

1.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Front Fog Light orDaytime Running Light Bulb

Headlight Aiming

Headlights

213

Page 217: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Insert the new bulb into the holeand turn it one-quarter turn clock-wise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.

(Driver’s side)Install the upper part of the airintake duct.

(Driver’s side)Install the engine compartmentcorner cover, and secure it withtwo fastener pins.

Install the engine compartmentside cover.

Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Start the engine. If you arereplacing a driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel all the way tothe right. If you are replacing apassenger’s side bulb, turn thesteering wheel to the left. Turn offthe engine.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

2.

3.

1.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing the Front Turn Signal/Parking Light Bulb

214

Page 218: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the holding clip from themiddle edge of the inner fendercover, and pull the inner fendercover back.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the bulb from the socketby pushing it in and turning itcounterclockwise until it unlocks.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the socket into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Push the inner fender cover inplace. Install the holding clip, andlock it in place by pushing on itscenter.

Open the trunk.Using a small screwdriver, pop upthe pin in the center of thefastener, then remove the fastener.Unscrew and remove the cargonet hook from the fender. Pullback the trunk lining.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

3.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.1.

2.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing the Rear Turn SignalBulb (in Fenders)

215

Page 219: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Reinstall the trunk lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.

Insert the fastener into the hole onthe side of the trunk lining, andpush in the head of the fastener.Screw the cargo net hook into thefender.

Determine which back-up lightis out (left or right), then openthe trunk.

Pop up the pin in the center ofthe left or right corner fastenerwith a small screwdriver, andremove the fastener.

Remove the left sidefastener the same way.

Pull out the outside edge of therubber stop, then push the stopoutward, and pull it to remove it.

Remove thescrew from the trunk lid innerhandle, and remove the handletrim.

Pull back the corner of thetrunk lid lining.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1 a.

b.

c.

d.

e.

Left sideonly:

Right side only:

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing the Back-up Light Bulb(in Trunk Lid)

216

RIGHT STOP

CORNERFASTENER

CORNERFASTENER

LEFT STOP

TRUNK LIDINNERHANDLE

LEFT SIDE FASTENER

Page 220: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Reinstall the trunk lid lining. Makesure it is installed under the edgeof the trunk seal.

Insert the socket into the lightassembly. Turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Install all removed parts.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb straightinto the socket until it bottoms.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Lights

Maintenance 217

Page 221: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater, or isopropyl alcohol.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.

If you use a non-Acura floor mats,make sure they fit properly and thatthey can be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

The driver’s floor mat that camewith your vehicle hooks over thefloor mat anchors. This keeps thefloor mat from sliding forward andpossibly interfering with the pedals.

Seat Belts, Floor Mats

Maintenance

Seat Belts Floor Mats

218

LOOP

FLOOR MAT ANCHORS

Page 222: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

2.

1.

3.

5.

4.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 219

LOCK TAB

BLADE REINFORCEMENT

BLADE

Page 223: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information about your tires,how and when to inspect your tiresfor damage and wear, and what to dowhen your tires need to be replaced.

Your vehicle is equipped with highperformance all-season tires(marked All Season or M S on thesidewalls). These tires provideexcellent handling and brakingperformance in most drivingsituations.

Your vehicle is equipped with highperformance summer tires. Thesetires have a high-traction compoundand tread pattern to provide superioracceleration, cornering, and stoppingunder most driving conditions.

However, these tires are not suitablefor driving on snow or ice, so all-season or winter tires must beinstalled for winter drivingconditions.

See page for winter drivingconditions.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

6.

7.

224

All Models Except 6-Speed with SummerTires

6-Speed with Summer Tires

Wiper Blades, Tires

Maintenance

Tires

Tyre Types

Inflation

220

Page 224: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeed.

The compact spare tire pressure is:Because your tires have a low profile,do not rely on a visual inspection todetermine whether the tires have theproper air pressure.

Instead, we recommend that you usea gauge to measure the air pressures

. Even tiresthat are in good condition may looseone to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1 to0.2 kgf/cm ) par month.

Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

Acura strongly recommends that younot drive faster than posted speedlimits and conditions allow. If youdecide it is safe to drive at highspeeds (over 118 mph or 190 kph),be sure to adjust the cold tirepressures as shown below. If you donot adjust the tire pressure,excessive heat can build up andcause sudden tire failure.

CONTINUED

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure forNormal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure forNormal Driving Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure for

High Speed Driving

Automatic Transmission Models

Manual Transmission ModelsAll Models

Tires

Maintenance

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

Recommended Tire Pressures forHigh Speed Driving

at least once a month

221

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P235/45R17 93W

35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

P235/45R17 93W235/45R17 93W P235/45R17 93W

235/45R17 93W

39 psi (270 kPa ,2.7 kgf/cm )35 psi (240 kPa ,2.4 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

Front:

Rear:

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Page 225: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

When you return to normal speeddriving, be sure to readjust the tirepressure for normal driving. Youshould wait until the tires are coldbefore adjusting the tire pressure.

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold air pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional technical information,see page .

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

If you check the pressures when thetires are hot (the vehicle has beendriven several miles), you will seereadings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreadings.

Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on page .

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured. Youshould look closely for punctures if atire starts losing pressure.

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either or these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthe tires are cold. This means thevehicle has been parked for at leastthree hours. If you have to drive thevehicle before checking pressures,the tires can still be considered‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile(1.6 km).

258

221

Tires

Maintenance

Tire Inspection

222

Page 226: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your vehicle’s tires have wearindicators molded into the tread.When the tread wears down to thatpoint, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7mm) wide band running across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire. A tire that is this worn givesvery little traction on wet roads. Youshould replace the tire if you can seethe tread wear indicator in three ormore places around the tire.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

Move the tires to the positionsshown in the illustration each timethey are rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

Tires

Maintenance

Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation

223

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR

Front Front

(Front DirectionalTires and Wheels)

(Front Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Page 227: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Wheels:

Tires:

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size information.

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If your vehicle is equipped withsummer tires, be aware that thesetires are not designed for winterdriving conditions. For moreinformation, consult your Acuradealer.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s side wall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theanti-lock brake and the vehiclestability assist systems to workinconsistently.

258

259

(All season tire)

(Summer tire)

Tires

Maintenance

Replacing Tires

Wheel and Tire Specifications

Winter Driving

Summer Tires

224

17 x 8.0 JJ

P235/45R17 93W

235/45R17 93W

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

Page 228: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If you mount snow tires on yourAcura, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Because your Acura has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices, withrubber chain tensioners on the fronttires. Use traction devices only whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires. Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Tires

Maintenance

Snow Tires

Tire Chains

225

NOTICE: Traction devices that are thewrong size or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

Page 229: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfurther corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your Acura dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

Checking the Battery

Maintenance

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

226

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Page 230: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fan cycles twice).Preferably do this once a month.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(6-speed manual) or Park(automatic).

Vehicle Storage

Maintenance 227

Page 231: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

228

Page 232: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 230....................Changing a Flat Tire . 231

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 236................................Jump Starting . 238

..............If the Engine Overheats . 240.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 242..........Charging System Indicator . 242

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 243...............Brake System Indicator . 244

..............................................Fuses . 245..............................Fuse Locations . 247

......................Emergency Towing . 249..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 251

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking Care of the Unexpected 229

Page 233: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replacedand put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

Do not mount snow chains on it.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Turn off the VSA system (seepage ).Driving with the compact sparetire may activate the VSA system.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.On models with manual

transmission, do not drive for along period with the compactspare tire mounted on a frontwheel; it will damage the limitedslip differential.

191

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected230

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

(The M/T compact spare is shown.)

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Page 234: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or Reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Open the trunk. Raise the trunkfloor by lifting up on the back edge.

Take the tool case out of the sparetire.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected 231

TOOL CASE JACK

TRUNK FLOORSPARE TIRE

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

Page 235: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel wrench.

Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by an arrow molded intothe underside of the body. Placethe jack under the jacking point.Turn the end bracket clockwiseuntil the top of the jack contactsthe jacking point. Make sure thejacking point tab is resting in thejack notch.

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

6. 7. 8.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected232

WHEEL WRENCHWHEEL WRENCH EXTENSION

Page 236: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Temporarilyplace the flat tire on the groundwith the outside surface of thewheel facing up. You could scratchthe wheel if you put it face down.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

9. 10. 11.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected 233

BRAKE HUB

Page 237: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt. Attach the wingbolt to the bolt extension over thespacer cone.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

12. 13.

14.

15.

16.

17.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected234

WING BOLT SPACERCONE

BOLTEXTENSION

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

Page 238: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Store the jack and tools in the toolcase. Place the tool case in the flattire.

Store the center cap in the trunk.

Lower the trunk floor, and closethe trunk lid.

18.

19.

20.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected 235

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Page 239: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights, and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there isprobably something wrong withthe electrical circuit for theignition switch or starter motor.You will need a qualifiedtechnician to determine theproblem (seeon page ).

Check these things:

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminal connec-tions (see page ). You canthen try jump starting the vehiclefrom a booster battery (see page

).

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, the shiftlever must be in Park or Neutral.

238

226

238

249

If the Engine Won’t Start

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

Emergency Towing

236

Page 240: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the warning indicator maynot be working.

56

177

245

249

If the Engine Won’t Start

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

Taking Care of the Unexpected 237

Page 241: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, stereo system,lights, etc. Put the transmission inNeutral or Park, and set theparking brake.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

You cannot start an Acura with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or like ice, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Jump Starting

Taking Care of the Unexpected

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

238

NOTICE:

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extremecold, the electrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

Page 242: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once the vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromthe vehicle, then from the boosterbattery. Disconnect the positivecable from the vehicle, and thenfrom the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until everything isdisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

The numbers in the illustrationshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

7.

6.

5.

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Jump Starting

239

Page 243: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.Turn off all accessories, and turnon the hazard warning indicators.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If the vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

249

If the Engine Overheats

Taking Care of the Unexpected

EmergencyTowing

240

NOTICE:

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperaturegauge pointer at the red mark cancause serious damage to your engine.

Page 244: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Start the engine and set theinterior temperature to maximum.Add coolant to the radiator up tothe base of the filler neck. If youdo not have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Using gloves or large heavy cloth,turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark(see onpage ).

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

8.

9.

7.

11.

10.

6.

249

207

If the Engine Overheats

Taking Care of the Unexpected

EmergencyTowing

Adding Engine Coolant

241

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Page 245: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing

or stays on, the oil pressure hasdropped very low or lost pressure.Serious engine damage is possibleand you should take immediateaction.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightlywhen the engine is running,

the battery is not being charged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

1.

2.

3.

4.

167

204

249

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Charging System Indicator

242

NOTICE: Running the engine with lowoil pressure can cause seriousmechanical damage almost immediately.Turn of f the engine as soon as you cansaf ely get the vehicle stopped.

Page 246: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

To check if they are set, turn theignition to ON (II), without startingthe engine. The MalfunctionIndicator Lamp will come on for 20seconds. If it then goes off, thereadiness codes are set. If it blinks 5times, the readiness codes are notset. If possible, do not take yourvehicle for a state emissions testuntil the readiness codes are set.Refer to State Emissions Testing formore information (see page ).

If the indicator comes onwhile driving, it means oneof the engine’s emissions

control systems may have a problem.Even though you may feel nodifference in your vehicle’sperformance, it can reduce your fueleconomy and cause increasedemissions. Continued operation maycause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be a loose or missing fuel fillcap. Tighten the cap until it clicks atleast three times. Tightening the capwill not turn the indicator offimmediately; it takes at least threedays of normal driving.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may go off as youcontinue driving, have the vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your vehicle battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. If takes at leastthree days of normal driving to setthe codes again.

263

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Readiness Code

243

NOTICE: If you keep driving with theMalf unction Indicator Lamp on, youcan damage your vehicle’s emissioncontrols and the engine. Those repairsmay not be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

Page 247: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. Press lightly on thebrake pedal to see if it feels normal.If it does, check the brake fluid levelthe next time you stop at a servicestation (see page ).

The brake system indicatornormally comes on whenyou turns the ignitionswitch to ON (II) and as areminder to check theparking brake. It will stayon if you do not fullyrelease the parking brake.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by an Acura dealerimmediately.

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

211

249

Brake System Indicator

EmergencyTowing

Taking Care of the Unexpected244

Canada

U.S.

Page 248: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Remove the screws with aphillips-head screwdriver.

The vehicle’s fuses are in two fuseboxes. The interior fuse box is onthe driver’s lower left side. Toremove the fuse box lid, put yourfinger in the notch on the lid, pull ittoward you, and take it out of itshinges.

The under-hood fuse box is on thedriver’s side next to the air cleanerhousing.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuses control thatdevice. Check those fuses first, butcheck all the fuses before decidingthat a blown fuse is the cause.Replace any blown fuses, and checkif the device works.

1.

2.

3.

247 248

CONTINUED

Checking and Replacing Fuses

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected 245

UNDER-HOODINTERIOR FUSE

BLOWN

Page 249: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

5.

6.

4.140

Fuses

Taking Care of the Unexpected246

NOTICE:

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with onethat has a higher rating greatlyincreases the chances of damaging theelectrical system. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

Page 250: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

* *

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

6789

10

11121314151617181920212223

15 A7.5 A15 A30 A20 A15 A30 A7.5 A20 A40 A40 A15 A30 A40 A40 A40 A40 A

100 A50 A

Right Headlight Low BeamBack UpIGPCondenser FanFront Fog LightDaytime Running LightRadiator Fan MotorMG Clutch RelayHorn, StopRear DefrosterBack UP, ACCHazard WarningVSA Pump Motor RelayVSA Fail Safe RelayFI ECUPower SeatHeater MotorBatteryIGI Main

12345

15 A30 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A

Left Headlight Low BeamRear Defroster CoilLeft Headlight High BeamSmall LightRight Headlight High Beam

U.S. models Canadian models1 : 2 :

1

2

Fuse Locations

Taking Care of the Unexpected 247

UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

Page 251: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

123456789

15 A15 A

15 A20 A7.5 A7.5 A20 A15 A

DBWIGI CoilNot UsedLAFRadioInterior LightsBack UpDoor LockFront Accessory Socket

101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233

7.5 A30 A

20 A20 A20 A20 A20 A15 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A20 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A

IGI OPDSIGI WiperNot Used

Driver’s Power Seat (Slide)Seat HeaterDriver’s Power Seat (Recline)Passenger’s Power Seat (Slide)IGI ACGIGI Fuel PumpWasherMeterSRSIGPRear Left Power WindowRear Right Power WindowFront Right Power WindowFront Left Power WindowMoonroofOP1HACOP2ACCHAC OP

Passenger’s Power Seat (Recline)

Fuse Locations

Taking Care of the Unexpected248

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Page 252: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

Shift the transmission to Neutral.

Shift to D, then to N.Turn off the engine.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andthe cables lift that end of the vehicleoff the ground. Your vehicle’s sus-pension and body can be seriouslydamaged.

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclebehind another vehicle with just arope or chain. It is very dangerous.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

If your Acura cannot be transportedby flat-bed, it should be towed bywheel-lift equipment with the frontwheels off the ground. If, due todamage, your vehicle must be towedwith the front wheels on the ground,do the following:

Release the parking brake.

Start the engine.Release the parking brake.

Automatic Transmission:

6-speed Manual Transmission:Sling-type Equipment

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This method of towingis unacceptable.

This is the best way totransport your Acura.

This isan acceptable way to tow yourAcura.

Emergency Towing

Taking Care of the Unexpected 249

NOTICE: Improper towing preparationwill damage the transmission. Followthe above procedure exactly. If youcannot shif t the transmission or startthe engine (automatic transmission),your vehicle must be transported withthe f ront wheels of f the ground.

Page 253: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If your vehicle is equipped with afront spoiler, remove it beforetowing so it is not damaged.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

If you decide to tow your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,make sure you use a properly-designed and attached tow bar.Prepare the vehicle for towing asdescribed previously, and leave theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) position so the steering wheeldoes not lock. Make sure the radioand any items plugged into theaccessory power socket are turnedoff so they do not run down thebattery.

Emergency Towing

Taking Care of the Unexpected250

NOTICE:

NOTICE:

Trying to lif t or tow yourvehicle by the bumpers will causeserious damage. The bumpers are notdesigned to support the vehicle’s weight.

The steering system can bedamaged if the steering wheel is locked.Leave the ignition switch in theACCESSORY (I) position, and makesure the steering wheel turns f reelybef ore you begin towing.

Page 254: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing serviceto pull it out (see page ).

Remove the towing hook, hookextension, and wheel wrench fromthe tool case in the spare tire.

Using the wheel wrench, fastenthe extension into the bolt hole inthe anchor.

For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can use thedetachable towing hook that mountson the anchor in the front bumper.

To use the towing hook:Remove the cover from thebumper.

3.

1.

2.

249

CONTINUED

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Taking Care of the Unexpected 251

Page 255: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Screw the towing hook into theextension and tighten it securelyby hand.

4.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Taking Care of the Unexpected252

NOTICE: To avoid damage to yourvehicle, use the towing hook f orstraight, f lat ground towing only. Donot tow at an angle. The tow hookshould not be used to tow the vehicleonto a f lat bed. Do not use it as a tiedown.

Page 256: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Acura, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 254................................Specifications . 256

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 258

.................................Treadwear . 258......................................Traction . 258

.............................Temperature . 259.................................Tire Labeling . 259

.......................Emissions Controls . 260.....................The Clean Air Act . 260

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 260

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 260

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 260

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 261....................PGM-FI System . 261

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 261

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 261

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 261

....................Replacement Parts . 261..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 262

..............State Emissions Testing . 263

Technical Information

Technical Information 253

Page 257: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourAcura dealer uses to register yourvehicle for warranty purposes. It isalso necessary for licensing andinsuring your vehicle. The easiestplace to find the VIN is on a platefastened to the top of the dashboard.You can see it by looking throughthe windshield on the driver’s side. Itis also on the Certification label at-tached to the driver’s doorjamb, andis stamped on the engine com-partment bulkhead. The VIN is alsoprovided in bar code on theCertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information254

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

Page 258: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block.

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information 255

ENGINE NUMBER

TRANSMISSIONNUMBER

Page 259: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

- -

Specifications

Technical Information256

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

Capacities

186.2 in (4,730 mm)72.2 in (1,835 mm)56.7 in (1,441 mm)107.9 in (2,740 mm)62.1 in (1,577 mm)62.0 in (1,576 mm)

HFC-134a (R-134a)17.6 19.4 oz (500 550 g)

ND-OIL8

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Fuel tank

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidManualtransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

7.6 US qt (7.2 )3.1 US qt (2.9 )5.3 US qt (5.0 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity: 0.16 US gal (0.6 )Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

2.3 US qt (2.2 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

2.14 US gal (8.1 )2.09 US gal (7.9 )

1.66 US gal (6.3 )1.69 US gal (6.4 )

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

U.S. VehicleCanada Vehicle

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

1

2

Page 260: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

--

--

---------

****

Specifications

Technical Information 257

Lights

Battery

Fuses

Engine

Alignment

Tires

3.50 x 3.39 in (89.0 x 86.0 mm)

12 V 21/5 W

195.8 cu-in (3,210 cm )

Water cooled 4-strokeSOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6),

gasoline engine

12 V 21 W12 V 51 W (HB4)

DRL (Canadian models)Front turn signal/Side marker/Parking lightsFog LightsRear turn signal lightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightCeiling lightTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightsVanity mirror lightsSpotlights

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

21 CP3 CP5 W5 W2 CP5 W4 CP

Capacity 65 AH/20 HR

Interior

Under-hood

12 V

51 W (HB3)12 V

11 : 1

See page 248 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door on each side of thedashboard.See page 247 or the fuse boxcover.

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°30’1°00’

3°17’

P235/45R17 93W235/45R17 93W

IZFR6K-11SKJ20DR-M11

35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Size

PressureT145/70R17 96MT135/80R16 101M

FrontRearFrontRearFront

NGK:DENSO:

Front/Rear

Spare

Front

RearSpare

A/T Vehicles:M/T Vehicles:

All season tireSummer tireVehicles with manual transmissionVehicles with automatic transmission

1 :2 :3 :4 :

1

2

3

4

Page 261: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

-The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)

Technical Information

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

258

Page 262: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

--

--

--

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

Date of manufacture.Tire type code.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Tire Identification Number (TIN) isa group of numbers and letters thatlook like the following example TIN.

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Rim diameter in inches.

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire width in millimeters.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance, which all passengervehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109 and No. 139.Grades B and A represent higherlevels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

P

R

DOT

2202

23545

1793

W

OBGN

PVC

Temperature A, B, C

Tire Labeling

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles), Tire Labeling

Tire Identif ication NumberTire Size

Technical Information 259

DOT OBGN PVC 2202

P235/45R17 93W

Page 263: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian Motor VehicleSafety Standards (CMVSS) forEmissions valid at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a PositiveCrankcase Ventilation System. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The Positive Crank-case Ventilation valve routes themfrom the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are then

drawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

Emissions Controls

Technical Information

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

260

Page 264: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control, ExhaustGas Recirculation and Three WayCatalytic Converter. These foursystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under alloperating conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR) system takes some of theexhaust gas and routes it back intothe intake manifold. Adding exhaustgas to the air/fuel mixture reducesthe amount of NOx produced whenthe fuel is burned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to worktogether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newAcura replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

2

2

Emissions Controls

Technical Information

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

261

Page 265: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

The three way catalytic convertercontains platinum, palladium, andrhodium. These metals serve ascatalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Acura partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your vehicle away from highgrass, dry leaves, or other flamma-bles.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Technical Information262

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERTHREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

Page 266: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle re-tested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for re-testingby doing the following.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (approximately 3minutes).

CONTINUED

State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

Technical Information 263

Page 267: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 6th (M/T). Do not usethe cruise control. When trafficallows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour Acura dealer.

State Emissions Testing

Technical Information264

Page 268: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

....Customer Service Information . 266....................Warranty Coverages . 267

Reporting Safety Defects..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 268

.....................Authorized Manuals . 269

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty and Customer Relations 265

Page 269: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Acura dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact the AcuraCustomer Relations Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to youIn Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin

Islands:

Bella International Corp.C-1 Bechara St. Segarra CornerPuerto Nuevo, Puerto Rico 00920

Tel:(787) 620-7020

254

Customer Service Information

Technical Information266

CUSTOMER RELATIONSRELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Acura Client ServicesMail Stop 500-2N-7E1919 Torrance Blvd.Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel:1-888-9-ACURA-9

Fax:Toll-free 1-877-939-0909Toronto (416) 287-4776

Page 270: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Your new Acura is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Acura accessories are covered underthis warranty. Time and mileagelimits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

covers all Acurareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from an Acura dealer.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2004 Acura Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your Acura’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2004 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

Warranty and Customer Relations

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

267

Page 271: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying Acura AutomobileDivision, American Honda Motor Co.,Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or AcuraAutomobile Division, AmericanHonda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

Warranty and Customer Relations268

Page 272: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

*2004

ACU

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Acura dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

269

Publication

Form Number

61SEP00

61SEP00EL

61SEP30

31SEP600

31SEP700

31SEP700

31SEPQ00

ACU-R

Price

Each

$69.00

$47.00

$44.00

$37.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Form Description

2004 Acura TL Service Manual

2004 Acura TL

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2004 Acura TL

Body Repair Manual

2004 Acura TL Owner’s Manual

2004 Acura TL Navigation Manual

2004 Acura TL

Maintenance Journal

2004 Acura TL Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurringobligation.

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

www. helminc. com

Page 273: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

SHIP

TO

PAYMENT

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

270

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

Page 274: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

CONTINUED

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 52, 242............................Jump Starting . 238

..............................Maintenance . 226............................Specifications . 257

..............................Before Driving . 163....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 19

...........................Beverage Holder . 106Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 189.............Break-in, New Linings . 164

...........................................Fluid . 211.......................................Parking . 103

.................System Indicator . 52, 244

........................Wear Indicators . 188.............................Braking System . 188

........................Break-in, New Car . 164..Brightness Control, Instruments . 75

........................Brights, Headlights . 74Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 216.................................Fog Lights . 213

............................Specifications . 257............Turn Signal Lights . 214, 215

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 213

............................Capacities Chart . 256.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 46

............................Carrying, Cargo . 171Cassette Player

............................................Care . 138...................................Operation . 136

..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii..................................Ceiling Light . 104

........................Certification Label . 254...................................Chains, . 225

...Accessories and Modifications . 168................................Accessories . 169

............................Modifications . 170ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 80............Accessory Power Sockets . 106

................Adding Engine Coolant . 207........................Adding Engine Oil . 204

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 205...............................Airbag (SRS) . 9, 22

...............Additional Information . 22......................................Servicing . 28

...................System Components . 22..............Air Conditioning System . 110

.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 221......................................Antifreeze . 207

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 53, 189

...................................Operation . 189..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 140

.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 80................................Audio System . 117

...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 76

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 20

.............Automatic Speed Control . 142..............Automatic Transmission . 181

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 256...............Checking Fluid Level . 209

.......................................Shifting . 181.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 181

.......................................Shifting . 181....................Shift Lock Release . 185

tires

Index

A

B

C

I

Page 275: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

**

**

Changing Oil........................................How to . 205......................................When to . 195

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 231...Charging System Indicator . 52, 242

............Checklist, Before Driving . 176..................Childproof Door Locks . 84

.....................................Child Safety . 29..............................Booster Seats . 43

...................................Child Seats . 36..........................................Infants . 34

............................Large Children . 42.........................................LATCH . 38

......................Risks with Airbags . 30.............................Small Children . 35

.........................................Tethers . 41.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 30

Cleaning.................................Floor Mats . 218

...................................Seat Belts . 218...............Climate Control System . 115

..............................................Clock . 103..........................CO in the Exhaust . 46.......................Compact Spare . 230

.................Console Compartment . 107...............Consumer Information . 265

.............Controls, Instruments and . 49Coolant

........................................Adding . 207....................................Checking . 167

.........................Proper Solution . 207...................Temperature Gauge . 57

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 260

................Cruise Control Indicator . 54............Cruise Control Operation . 142

...................................Cup Holders . 106..........Customer Relations Office . 266

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 2, 50

............Daytime Running Lights . 74Daytime Running Light

...................................Indicator . 55............Defects, Reporting Safety . 268

................Defogger, Rear Window . 77

..............Defrosting the Windows . 114....................................Dimensions . 256

...............Dimming the Headlights . 74

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 209

..................................Engine Oil . 167..........................Directional Signals . 74

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 188.................................Disc Changer . 129

...Disc Changer Error Messages . 135.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 206

Doors..............................Monitor Light . 60

......................Power Door Locks . 82..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 258

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5...........................................Driving . 175

....................................Economy . 168Driving Position Memory

..........................................System . 93

..............................Economy, Fuel . 168............Emergencies on the Road . 229.............Battery, Jump Starting . 238...........Brake System Indicator . 244

................Changing a Flat Tire . 231.....Charging System Indicator . 242

tire

Index

D

E

II

Page 276: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

* CONTINUED

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 168.........................................Gasoline . 164

...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 56...........................................Gauge . 57

................Octane Requirement . 164........................Tank, Filling the . 165

................Gas Station Procedures . 165

...................................Fan, Interior . 122Features, Comfort and

..............................Convenience . 109....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 165

........................................Filter, Oil . 205.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 76

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 231.....................................Floor Mats . 218

Fluids..........Automatic Transmission . 209

..........................................Brake . 211.........................................Clutch . 211

..............Manual Transmission . 210..........................Power Steering . 212

................Windshield Washers . 208FM Stereo Radio

...................................Reception . 122

.....................................Fog Lights . 75

..........................Four-way Flashers . 76..............................Front Airbags . 9, 22

......................................Front Seats . 90

......................................Adjusting . 90.........................................Heaters . 96.....................................Airbags . 9, 22

.................................................Fuel . 164......................Fill Door and Cap . 165

...........................................Gauge . 57................Octane Requirement . 164

........................Reserve Indicator . 56........................Tank, Filling the . 165

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 245

..................Checking the Fuses . 245.........Hazard Warning Flashers . 76......If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 249

............................Jump Starting . 238.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 242...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 243

..................Overheated Engine . 240.......................................Towing . 249

.........................Emergency Brake . 103......................Emergency Flashers . 76

......................Emergency Towing . 249............Emergency Trunk Opener . 84

.......................Emissions Controls . 260.............Emissions Testing, State . 263

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 57

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 52, 243.........................................Oil Life . 64

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 52, 242

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 204...............................Overheating . 240

............................Specifications . 257

....................Speed Limiter . 179, 185.......................................Starting . 177

...................Engine, . 236

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 164.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 260

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 46Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 17

if it won’t start

Index

F

G

III

Page 277: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

**

**

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 232.......................................Jack, Tire . 231

................................Jump Starting . 238

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 57

...............................................Fuel . 57...............................Speedometer . 57

.................................Tachometer . 57Gearshift Lever Positions

..........Automatic Transmission . 1816-speed Manual

.........................Transmission . 178......................................Glove Box . 107

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 254Ignition

..............................................Keys . 79...........................................Switch . 80

............Timing Control System . 261........................Immobilizer System . 81

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.........................................Indicators . 52

......ABS (Anti-Lock Brake) . 53, 189Brake (Parking and Brake

............................System) . 52, 244................Charging System . 52, 242

.............................Cruise Control . 54DRL (Daytime Running

..................................Lights) . 55...................................Fog Light . 56...................................High Beam . 55

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 56......................................Low Fuel . 56

................Low Oil Pressure . 54, 242...........................Side Airbag Off . 53

.........................................SRS . 26, 53Turn Signal and Hazard

...................................Warning . 55............................VSA Activation . 54

.................................VSA System . 54...............................Infant Restraint . 34

......................................Infant Seats . 34..........Tether Anchorage Points . 41

...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 221...................................Inside Mirror . 91

.............................Inspection, Tire . 222............................Instrument Panel . 51

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 52........Instrument Panel Brightness . 75

...............................Interior Lights . 104........................................Introduction . i

.......................Halogen Fog Bulbs . 213..........HandsFree Link (HFL) . 70, 149

..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 76........................................Headlights . 74

........................................Aiming . 213Automatic Lighting Off

.....................................Feature . 76.......Daytime Running Lights . 74

..................High Beam Indicator . 55.........................Reminder Chime . 74

...................................Turning on . 74..............................Head Restraints . 89

.................High-Low Beam Switch . 74

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 145

....................................Hood Latch . 212.......................Hood, Opening the . 166

Index

H

I

J

IV

Page 278: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

CONTINUED

..................................................Keys . 79...............Keyless Memory Setting . 66

...................Neutral Gear Position . 182..................New Vehicle Break-in . 164

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 254

.......................Label, Certification . 254.................Lane Change, Signaling . 74

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 19Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 213.......................................Indicator . 52

.........................................Parking . 74..................................Turn Signal . 74

.....................................Load Limit . 172......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 80

........................Lockout Prevention . 82Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 80..................................Glove Box . 107

.................................Power Door . 82...........................................Trunk . 83

........................Low Coolant Level . 167...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 52, 242

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 256

..............Luggage, . 171

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 164.........................................Odometer . 62

...............................Odometer, Trip . 62Oil

........................Change, How to . 205......................Change, When to . 195......................Checking Engine . 167..............Pressure Indicator . 52, 242

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 204

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 80

..................................Maintenance . 193.....................................Messages . 64

........................................Minder . 195...Owner Maintenance Checks . 198

........................................Record . 200..........................................Safety . 194

Malfunction Indicator....................................Lamp . 52, 243

...................Manual Transmission . 178........Manual Transmission Fluid . 210

.............Memory, Driving Position . 93...............................Meters, Gauges . 57

..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 91...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 170

.......................................Moonroof . 100.............Multi-Information Display . 59

............................Engine Oil Life . 64..........................HandsFree Link . 70

.........Keyless Memory Settings . 66.............Maintenance Messages . 64

.....................................Odometer . 62.................Outside Temperature . 63

............................Trip Computer . 65...................................Trip Meter . 62

Storing (Cargo)

Index

K

L

N

O

M

V

Page 279: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

*..................................Safety Belts . 8, 19

.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 268.................................Safety Features . 7

...........................................Airbags . 9..................................Door Locks . 11

..........................Head Restraints . 13.......................................Seat Belts . 8

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 12.............Safety Labels, Location of . 47

...............................Safety Messages . ii................................Satellite Radio . 124

.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 19...............Additional Information . 19

Onboard Refueling Vapor....................................Recovery . 260

..............................Outside Mirrors . 91.....................Outside Temperature . 63

....................Overheating, Engine . 240....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 198

..............Panel Brightness Control . 75........................Park Gear Position . 182

...........................................Parking . 187...............................Parking Brake . 103

Parking Brake and Brake System...............................Indicator . 52, 244

.................................Parking Lights . 74..Parking Over Things that Burn . 187

.............................PGM-FI System . 261...............Power Socket Locations . 106

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 17

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11...Additional Safety Precautions . 18

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 17........................Protecting Children . 29

Installing a Child Seat Using........................................Latch . 38

Installing a Child Seat with a..................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 40

Installing a Child Seat with a......................................Tether . 41

.................Selecting a Child Seat . 36.......................Protecting Infants . 34

.......Protecting Larger Children . 42.........Protecting Small Children . 35

..................Protecting Your Discs . 134

...................Radiator Overheating . 240Radio/Cassette/Disc Sound

........................................System . 117...................Readiness Codes . 243, 263

..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 215..........................Rear Seat Armrest . 89

............................Rear View Mirror . 91.................Rear Window Defogger . 77...............Reclining the Seat Backs . 88

.............................Reminder Lights . 52................Remote Audio Controls . 139

.......................Remote Transmitter . 85Replacement Information

................Engine Oil and Filter . 205

..........................................Fuses . 245................................Light Bulbs . 213

...........................................Tires . 224.............................Wiper Blades . 219

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 21

...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 167.........................Restraint, Child . 34, 35

..................Reverse Gear Position . 182................................Rotation, Tire . 223

Index

P

RS

VI

Page 280: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

CONTINUED

.....................................Tachometer . 57.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 229

....................................Tape Player . 136Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 258.....Emissions Control Systems . 260

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 262

.......................Temperature Gauge . 57....................Temperature, Outside . 63

........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 116..............Tether Anchorage Points . 41

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 262..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 78

..........................Time, Setting the . 103

.....................................Cleaning . 218................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14, 19

................................Maintenance . 21Reminder Light and

................................Beeper . 19, 52...................System Components . 19

...............Use During Pregnancy . 17....................................Seat Heaters . 96

........................Seats, Adjusting the . 90............................Security System . 141

........Sequential SportShift Mode . 183...............................Serial Number . 254

...........................Service Intervals . 195

...........................Service Manual . 269.........Service Station Procedures . 165

..........................Setting the Clock . 103.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 181

........................Shift Lock Release . 185...........................................Shifting . 181

................................Side Airbags . 9, 25........Side Airbag Off Indicator . 27, 53

......................Side Curtain Airbags . 26...............................Signaling Turns . 74

.....................................Snow Tires . 225................................Sound System . 117

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 230

............................Specifications . 257....................Specifications Charts . 256

................................Speed Control . 142..........SRS, Additional Information . 33

...Additional Safety Precautions . 28....................Airbag Components . 22

.............................Airbag Service . 28How the SRS Indicator

.......................................Works . 26How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 23...How Your Side Airbags Work . 25

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 26

.............................SRS Indicator . 26, 53....START (Ignition Key Position) . 80

.......................Starting the Engine . 177................With a Dead Battery . 238..............State Emissions Testing . 263

........Steam Coming from Engine . 236Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 78.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 80

...................Stereo Sound System . 117

....................Storing Your Vehicle . 227........................Sunglasses Holder . 108

....Supplemental Restraint System . 22......................................Servicing . 28

...............................SRS Indicator . 26...................System Components . 22

Index

T

VII

Page 281: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 172......................Vehicle Dimensions . 256

....Vehicle Identification Number . 254

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)....................................System . 190

........VSA System Indicator . 54, 190...VSA Activation Indicator . 54, 190

.........................VSA Off Switch . 191.............................Vehicle Storage . 227

.................................................VIN . 254..................................Viscosity, Oil . 204

....................................Tire Chains . 225.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 231

...............................................Tires . 220..............................Air Pressure . 221

.........................Checking Wear . 222..........................Compact Spare . 230

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 258......................................Inflation . 221

..................................Inspection . 222...................................Replacing . 224

......................................Rotating . 223...........................................Snow . 225

............................Specifications . 257.............................Summer Tire . 224

.......................Traction Devices . 225..........................Winter Driving . 224

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 231Towing

.....................................A Trailer . 192................Emergency Wrecker . 249

...........................Traction Devices . 225Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,..............................Automatic . 209

.Checking Fluid Level Manual . 210..................Fluid Selection . 209, 210

..............Identification Number . 254.............Shifting the Automatic . 190

..................Shifting the Manual . 178.............................Treadwear . 223, 258

................................Trip Computer . 65.......................................Trip Meter . 62

................................................Trunk . 80........Emergency Trunk Release . 84

.................................Opening the . 83...................Open Monitor Light . 60

....................................Turn Signals . 74

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 229

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 258........................Unleaded Gasoline . 164

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 206

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 47

..................Warranty Coverages . 267Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 208.......................................Indicator . 62.....................................Operation . 73

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 78............Alignment and Balance . 223

..........................Compact Spare . 230Windows

..................Operating the Power . 97...........................Rear, Defogger . 77

Index

U

V

W

VIII

Page 282: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

**Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 73...................................Defroster . 114

.....................................Washers . 208Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 219.....................................Operation . 73

....................................Worn Tires . 223.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 249

......................XM Satellite Radio . 124

U.S. and Canada only:: Canada only

Index

X

IX

Page 283: 200 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual Contentstechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/BEP0404OM/enu/TL0404OM.pdf2004 TL Online Reference Owner's Manual . Use these links (and links

Service Information Summary

Manual TransmissionGasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Spare Tire Pressure:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

API Service SJ ‘‘EnergyConserving’’ oil, SAE 5W-20viscosity (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

Manual Transmission ModelsFront:35 psi (240 kPa , 2.4 kgf/cm )Rear:

Automatic Transmission ModelsFront:

Rear:

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).Capacity:2.6 US qt (2.5 )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

209

204

210

212

211

17.09 US gal (64.7 )